EMS Technologies Canada HSD-MK2 Satcom Transeiver User Manual MN 1252 33412

EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. Satcom Transeiver MN 1252 33412

HSD-MK2 User Manual

Download: EMS Technologies Canada HSD-MK2 Satcom Transeiver User Manual MN 1252 33412
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]EMS Technologies Canada HSD-MK2 Satcom Transeiver User Manual MN 1252 33412
Document ID1306479
Application IDZFJHF7HM1hOFe//kLWNLag==
Document DescriptionHSD-MK2 User Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize322.98kB (4037260 bits)
Date Submitted2010-07-05 00:00:00
Date Available2010-07-05 00:00:00
Creation Date2017-11-08 23:51:43
Producing SoftwareGPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod2017-11-08 23:51:43
Document TitleMN-1252-33412
Document CreatorFrameMaker 8.0

eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual
MN-1252-33412, Revision 001
This document provides procedures for the equipment listed below.
Model
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Part Number
1252-A-3820-01
115 V ac or 28 V dc
23-15-30
TITLE PAGE T-1
3 JUN 10
PROPRIETARY STATEMENT
This document contains information which is proprietary and confidential to EMS Aviation (EMS Technologies
Canada, Ltd., Formation Inc., Sky Connect LLC). Neither this document nor the information contained within
may be used for any purpose other than the purpose for which it was prepared. Neither this document nor the
information contained within may be disclosed or copied without the prior written permission of EMS Aviation.
© 2010 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd., Formation Inc., Sky Connect LLC. All Rights Reserved.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual
Document Number: MN-1252-33412, Revision 001
Revision Table
Revision
001
ECR
N/A
Description
Draft release for review.
Cabin Network Xcelerator® and CNX® are registered trademarks of EMS Technologies, Ltd. Windows® is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other product, brand,
service, and company names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Our products are under continuous research and development. Any information may therefore be changed
without prior notice. EMS Aviation reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the product described
in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this
document to assure its accuracy, EMS Aviation assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in
this document, or from the use of the information contained herein.
Printed in Canada.
EMS Aviation
400 Maple Grove Road, Ottawa, Ontario, K2V 1B8, CANADA
EMS Aviation Reception:
(613) 591-9064
EMS Aviation Product Support:
(888) 300-7415 (calls are routed to an on-call Product Support specialist
after regular business hours)
+44 1684 290 020 (UK)
(613) 591-3086 (outside North America)
EMS Aviation E-mail Help:
support@emsaviation.com
EMS Aviation Web site:
www.emsaviation.com
EMS Aviation Sales and Marketing:
800-600-9759
23-15-30
TITLE PAGE T-2
3 JUN 10
CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORM
To help us improve the quality of our product documentation, EMS Aviation would appreciate your
comments and suggestions on this publication. Please complete the following customer survey and
send to EMS Aviation at:
EMS Aviation
400 Maple Grove Road
Ottawa, ON K2C 0P9
E-mail: techdocs@emsaviation.com
Publication information:
Publication number:
MN-1252-33412
Publication title:
HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSystem Description, Installation, and
Maintenance Manual
Latest issue date:
June 3, 2010
Document revision:
001
Customer information:
Name:
Company:
Tel:
Fax:
Email:
Comments and suggestions:
Date:
Comments:
23-15-30
CR-1
3 JUN 10
Blank Page
23-15-30
CR-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
RECORD OF REVISIONS
When revisions are received, insert revised pages, record the date, and initial.
Revision
Number
Issue
Date
Date
Inserted
Inserted
by (initial)
Revision
Number
23-15-30
Issue
Date
Date
Inserted
Inserted
by (initial)
RR-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
RR-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
Service Bulletin
Number
N/A
Subject
N/A
Manual Rev. Manual Rev.
Number
Date
N/A
23-15-30
N/A
SBL-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
SBL-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
* An asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current revision.
F indicates a right foldout page with a blank back.
Section
Page
23-15-30
Date
LEP-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
LEP-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Illustration of Equipment .............................................................................INTRO-2
2. Product Terms and Conditions ...................................................................INTRO-2
3. Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................................INTRO-2
4. Safety Advisories .........................................................................................INTRO-6
1. Inmarsat System Overview................................................................................... 1-1
2. Equipment Overview ............................................................................................. 1-3
3. Equipment Specifications..................................................................................... 1-5
4. System Interfaces................................................................................................ 1-10
A. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC) .......................................................................... 1-10
B. Source Destination Identification (SDI) .......................................................................... 1-11
C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSI ....................................................................................... 1-11
D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin Wiring ............................................................................ 1-11
E. IRS ARINC 429 Interface ............................................................................................... 1-12
F. Antenna Interface ........................................................................................................... 1-14
G. CMU .............................................................................................................................. 1-14
H. Antenna Subsystem RF Interface .................................................................................. 1-14
5. User Interfaces..................................................................................................... 1-14
A. MCDU ............................................................................................................................ 1-14
B. WSC ............................................................................................................................... 1-15
C. Remote Reset ................................................................................................................ 1-15
D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface ............................................................................ 1-15
E. Ethernet Data Interfaces ................................................................................................ 1-16
F. POTS Tip/Ring Interfaces ............................................................................................... 1-16
G. CEPT-E1 Interface ......................................................................................................... 1-17
H. Maintenance Port Interface ............................................................................................ 1-17
(1) End User Access: Level 1 .......................................................................................... 1-17
(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2 ........................................................................ 1-17
I. Fault Indicator LED .......................................................................................................... 1-18
J. Self-Test ......................................................................................................................... 1-19
K. Remote Status Panel (Optional) .................................................................................... 1-19
23-15-30
TC-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
6. Software Description .......................................................................................... 1-19
A. Software Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-19
B. Operational Software Part Numbers .............................................................................. 1-19
C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT) ................................................................................ 1-20
1. Registering and Activating Terminals ................................................................. 2-1
A. Preparing Terminal Information ....................................................................................... 2-1
(1) Obtaining ISNs ............................................................................................................. 2-1
(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal Type ..................................... 2-1
B. Obtaining ICAO Addresses .............................................................................................. 2-2
C. Choosing Service Providers ............................................................................................ 2-2
D. Registering Terminals ...................................................................................................... 2-2
2. Configuring Terminals .......................................................................................... 2-3
A. Setting up Airborne Networks .......................................................................................... 2-3
B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services ....................................................................... 2-3
C. IMNs ................................................................................................................................ 2-3
D. MSNs ............................................................................................................................... 2-3
E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) .................. 2-4
F. Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ............... 2-4
G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ................................................. 2-4
H. Understanding CMU Messages ....................................................................................... 2-4
I. Configuring Swift 64 LES Access Codes ......................................................................... 2-4
(1) General Overview ........................................................................................................ 2-4
(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPU....................................................................... 2-5
J. Removing the LED Label .................................................................................................. 2-6
K. Activating Configurations ................................................................................................. 2-6
L. Verifying Configurations ................................................................................................... 2-7
3. Using Terminals .................................................................................................... 2-7
A. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls .................................................. 2-7
(1) Dial Code Prefixes ....................................................................................................... 2-8
(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication............................................................................... 2-10
B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface ...................................................................... 2-11
C. Using Data Connections ................................................................................................ 2-11
D. Operating the MCDU ..................................................................................................... 2-11
(1) Output Ports ............................................................................................................... 2-11
(2) Input Ports.................................................................................................................. 2-11
(3) Screen........................................................................................................................ 2-11
23-15-30
TC-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(4) Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 2-12
(5) Special Symbols......................................................................................................... 2-12
(6) Navigating the MCDU ................................................................................................ 2-13
(7) Viewing Flight Information.......................................................................................... 2-14
(8) Logging On and Off.................................................................................................... 2-14
(9) Viewing Channel Information ..................................................................................... 2-17
(10) Viewing Maintenance Information ............................................................................ 2-21
(11) Configuring Headsets............................................................................................... 2-23
E. Operating the WSC ........................................................................................................ 2-23
F. Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU .................................................... 2-24
(1) Modes of Operation.................................................................................................... 2-24
(2) Accepting and Making Calls....................................................................................... 2-24
1. Advisories .............................................................................................................. 3-1
2. Pre-Installation Inspection ................................................................................... 3-1
A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment ............................................................................. 3-1
B. Cabling Notes .................................................................................................................. 3-1
(1) Cabling ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
(2) Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations ............................................................................. 3-2
3. Mechanical Installation ......................................................................................... 3-2
A. Physical Placement .......................................................................................................... 3-2
B. Environmental Requirements ........................................................................................... 3-2
(1) Heating and Cooling..................................................................................................... 3-2
(2) Fan Tray Requirements ............................................................................................... 3-3
C. Chassis Grounding .......................................................................................................... 3-4
4. Electrical Installation ............................................................................................ 3-4
A. Cabling and Connector Requirements ............................................................................. 3-4
(1) Power Requirements.................................................................................................... 3-4
(2) Ground Requirements.................................................................................................. 3-4
(3) Cable Shielding and Termination ................................................................................. 3-4
B. Installation Wiring Notes .................................................................................................. 3-5
(1) Source/Destination Identification.................................................................................. 3-5
(2) Maintenance Port Interface .......................................................................................... 3-5
(3) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface ................................................................................ 3-6
(4) WOW Pins.................................................................................................................... 3-6
(5) ICAO IDs ...................................................................................................................... 3-7
(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional) .................................................................................. 3-9
(7) System Configuration Strapping ................................................................................ 3-10
(8) System Mode Strap Pins Coding ............................................................................... 3-10
(9) Call Light Activation Strapping ................................................................................... 3-11
23-15-30
TC-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(10) Hookswitch Strapping .............................................................................................. 3-11
(11) Priority 4 Call Strapping............................................................................................ 3-11
(12) Cockpit Voice Strapping........................................................................................... 3-12
(13) User Interfaces......................................................................................................... 3-12
(14) System Interfaces .................................................................................................... 3-13
C. Connection Details ......................................................................................................... 3-15
5. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test................................................................... 3-16
A. Overview ........................................................................................................................ 3-16
B. PIM Requirements ......................................................................................................... 3-16
C. PIM Test ........................................................................................................................ 3-16
D. PIM Test Results ........................................................................................................... 3-17
(1) PIM Test Overall Status ............................................................................................. 3-17
(2) Directional PIM Test Results...................................................................................... 3-19
6. Installation and Engineering Diagrams ............................................................. 3-19
A. Outline and Installation Diagrams .................................................................................. 3-19
B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment Drawings ...................................................... 3-19
7. Connection Details.............................................................................................. 3-19
1. Operational and Diagnostic Testing .................................................................. 4-35
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4-35
B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements ........................................................ 4-35
C. Terminal Maintenance Port Utility .................................................................................. 4-36
(1) General Overview ...................................................................................................... 4-36
(2) Connection Requirements.......................................................................................... 4-37
(3) Accessing the MPU.................................................................................................... 4-39
(4) Using the Terminal MPU ............................................................................................ 4-39
(5) Menu Item Descriptions ............................................................................................. 4-40
(6) Report Descriptions.................................................................................................... 4-53
(7) Activating Maintenance Reports ................................................................................ 4-56
D. Inmarsat Cause Codes .................................................................................................. 4-60
E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................................ 4-60
(1) Test Setup Procedure ................................................................................................ 4-61
(2) Post Test .................................................................................................................... 4-61
(3) Installation and Operational Verification Tests........................................................... 4-62
(4) Configuration Parameters Verification ....................................................................... 4-63
(5) System Power-up Checks.......................................................................................... 4-68
(6) System On-Air Checks............................................................................................... 4-70
(7) Antenna Tracking Checks .......................................................................................... 4-72
(8) Optional System Checks............................................................................................ 4-73
23-15-30
TC-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
2. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation ................................................................. 4-74
A. Troubleshooting Practices ............................................................................................. 4-74
(1) Non-specific Complaints ............................................................................................ 4-74
(2) Specific Complaints.................................................................................................... 4-74
B. Equipment Required ...................................................................................................... 4-74
C. Troubleshooting Aids ..................................................................................................... 4-74
(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays.................................................................................. 4-75
(2) Troubleshooting Table ............................................................................................... 4-79
D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures .................................................................... 4-86
(1) General ...................................................................................................................... 4-86
(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports File ............................................................................... 4-86
3. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures ................................................................... 4-88
4. Modification History............................................................................................ 4-88
1. Maintenance........................................................................................................... 5-1
2. Repair ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
A. Repair Tools and Supplies ............................................................................................... 5-1
B. Repair Procedures ........................................................................................................... 5-1
C. Battery Replacement ....................................................................................................... 5-1
D. Removal Procedures ....................................................................................................... 5-1
E. Repair Facility Approvals ................................................................................................. 5-1
F. Return for Repair Information ........................................................................................... 5-2
3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness .......................................................... 5-2
1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU .................................................... 6-1
A. Connecting to the MPU .................................................................................................... 6-4
B. Configuring the ORT Part Number ................................................................................... 6-4
C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters ............................................................ 6-5
(1) Configuring the Call Signaling Mode............................................................................ 6-5
(2) Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling ............................................................................ 6-5
(3) Configuring Ground Public Routing.............................................................................. 6-5
D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-6
(1) Configuring 4-wire Wiring............................................................................................. 6-6
(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing................................................................ 6-6
(3) Configuring 4-wire Parameters .................................................................................... 6-6
E. Configuring POTS Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-7
(1) Configuring POTS ........................................................................................................ 6-7
23-15-30
TC-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
F. Configuring CEPT-E1 Parameters .................................................................................... 6-7
(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface.................................................................................... 6-8
(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type..................................................................... 6-8
G. Configuring High Speed Data Services ........................................................................... 6-8
(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE Service....................................................................... 6-8
(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed Service ....................................................................... 6-8
(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed Service....................................................................... 6-9
(4) Configuring SBB High Speed Service.......................................................................... 6-9
H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters .................................................................................... 6-9
(1) Configuring Ethernet Wiring ......................................................................................... 6-9
(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode ............................................................................ 6-10
(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port Address ...................................................................... 6-10
(4) Configuring the Ethernet Mask................................................................................... 6-10
I. Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 ............................... 6-11
(1) Configuring the Host Name........................................................................................ 6-11
(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator Name.............................................................. 6-11
(3) Configuring the SNMP Server.................................................................................... 6-11
(4) Configuring the SNMP Community String.................................................................. 6-11
(5) Configuring the TFTP Server ..................................................................................... 6-12
(6) Configuring the DHCP Client ..................................................................................... 6-12
(7) Configuring the DHCP Server .................................................................................... 6-12
(8) Configuring Telnet Access ......................................................................................... 6-12
(9) Configuring the Managed Range ............................................................................... 6-12
(10) Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses ..................................................... 6-13
(11) Configuring the Access Point Name......................................................................... 6-13
J. Configuring Avionics Parameters ................................................................................... 6-13
(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS).......................................... 6-13
(2) Configuring the Secondary IRS.................................................................................. 6-14
(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed ............................................................. 6-14
(4) Configuring GNSS Equipment ................................................................................... 6-14
(5) Configuring the ICAO Code Source ........................................................................... 6-15
K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters .............................................................. 6-15
(1) Configuring the Forward ID ........................................................................................ 6-15
(2) Configuring Satellite Information ................................................................................ 6-16
(3) Configuring GES Service Provider Information.......................................................... 6-17
(4) Configuring the Frequency Table............................................................................... 6-18
(5) Configuring LES Service Provider Information........................................................... 6-19
(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode........................................................... 6-19
(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One ............................................. 6-20
(8) Configuring the Service Type Priority......................................................................... 6-20
23-15-30
TC-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters .......................................................................... 6-20
(1) Configuring the Antenna Type ................................................................................... 6-20
(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle .................................................... 6-21
(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle ......................................................... 6-21
(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle ........................................................... 6-21
(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss........................................................................ 6-22
(6) Configuring the Diplexer............................................................................................. 6-22
M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters ............................................................................ 6-23
(1) Configuring MCDU Wiring.......................................................................................... 6-23
(2) Configuring the MCDU Input Speed........................................................................... 6-23
(3) Configuring the MCDU Output Speed........................................................................ 6-23
(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller Type ..................................................................... 6-23
(5) Configuring the MCDU Type ...................................................................................... 6-24
(6) Configuring the MCDU Font Colour ........................................................................... 6-24
(7) Configuring Manual Dialing ........................................................................................ 6-24
(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection ................................................................... 6-24
(9) Configuring the Address Book Categories ................................................................. 6-25
N. Configuring the CMU ..................................................................................................... 6-25
(1) Configuring CMU Wiring ............................................................................................ 6-25
(2) Configuring the CMU Input Speed ............................................................................. 6-26
(3) Configuring the CMU Output Speed .......................................................................... 6-26
(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word............................................................. 6-26
(5) Configuring Hardcoded SAL ...................................................................................... 6-27
O. Configuring Terminal Operation .................................................................................... 6-27
(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions ............................................................... 6-27
(2) Configuring Transmit on Ground................................................................................ 6-27
(3) Configuring Self-test in Air ......................................................................................... 6-28
(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air................................................ 6-28
(5) Configuring MCDU PAST........................................................................................... 6-28
(6) Configuring Field Loadable Software ......................................................................... 6-28
(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy..................................................................... 6-29
(8) Configuring Logon Interrogation................................................................................. 6-29
(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam................................................................. 6-29
(10) Masking Position in Logs ......................................................................................... 6-29
(11) Configuring HSD SAL............................................................................................... 6-30
P. Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Parameters ................................................ 6-30
(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle ........................................................ 6-30
(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle.......................................................... 6-30
(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1 ...................................................... 6-31
(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2 ...................................................... 6-31
(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1 .................................................... 6-31
23-15-30
TC-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2 .................................................... 6-31
(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio ...................................................... 6-31
(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold....................................................................... 6-32
(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold......................................................... 6-32
2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application...................... 6-32
A. Creating an ORT Configuration ..................................................................................... 6-33
B. Opening a Saved ORT Configuration ............................................................................ 6-35
C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration .................................................... 6-35
D. Exporting an ORT File ................................................................................................... 6-37
E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal .............................................. 6-37
1. I-3 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-1
2. I-4 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-4
1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ........ F-1
A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-1
B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-1
C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276 ........................................................................F-2
D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via Williamsburg ....................................F-2
2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal......... F-2
A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-2
B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-3
C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271 ....................................................................F-5
D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg ......................................F-6
3. Understanding BOP Options................................................................................ F-6
4. Understanding LDUs and File Size ...................................................................... F-7
5. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count ......................................................... F-7
6. Understanding Word Format................................................................................ F-7
A. Understanding SALs ........................................................................................................F-7
B. Understanding Data .........................................................................................................F-7
C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) Definitions .............................................F-8
7. Understanding Word Types ................................................................................. F-8
A. Understanding the Full Binary Data Word .......................................................................F-9
B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data Word ...................................................................F-9
C. Understanding Protocol Words ........................................................................................F-9
23-15-30
TC-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
D. Understanding the Solo Word ........................................................................................F-10
E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT) .................................................................. F-11
F. Understanding End of Transmission (EOT) .................................................................... F-11
23-15-30
TC-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
TC-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure INTRO-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal........................................................................INTRO-2
Figure 1-1 Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System ........................................ 1-2
Figure 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM................................................................................. 1-4
Figure 1-3 HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal Interfaces ............................................................... 1-10
Figure 1-4 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN Connections ......................................................... 1-16
Figure 2-1 Dialing-Sequence Components.................................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-2 Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence.......................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-3 MCDU Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-4 MCDU Menus ........................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 3-1 Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed) ............................. 3-3
Figure 3-2 ICAO ID, Hex to Binary Conversion ........................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-3 Remote Reset Circuit Switch...................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-4 Remote LED Panel Circuit........................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-5 RJ45 Connector Terminator Details ......................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-6 Example PIM Test Results ....................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3-7 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram
(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ............................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-8 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram
(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ............................................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-9 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ............................................... 3-31
Figure 3-10 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ............................................... 3-33
Figure 4-1 Remote Connection, Maintenance Cable................................................................. 4-38
Figure 4-2 Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable .................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-3 Menu 2 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-42
Figure 4-4 Menu 3 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-43
Figure 4-5 Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters .......................................... 4-45
Figure 4-6 Menu 4 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-48
Figure 4-7 Menu 10 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-49
Figure 4-8 Menu 13 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4-9 Menu 14 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-51
Figure 4-10 Menu 15 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-51
Figure 4-11 Menu 21 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-52
23-15-30
TC-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 4-12 Menu 30 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-53
Figure 4-13 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports .............................................................. 4-56
Figure 4-14 Example Report 23 Output ..................................................................................... 4-57
Figure 4-15 Prompt to Select Channel for Report Generation................................................... 4-58
Figure 4-16 Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 3 ............................................... 4-58
Figure 4-17 Example of Report 20............................................................................................. 4-59
Figure 4-18 Example Report 21................................................................................................. 4-59
Figure 4-19 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display Example ................................................. 4-67
Figure 4-20 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example ......................................... 4-70
Figure 4-21 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example.................................................. 4-72
Figure 4-22 Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated) .................................................. 4-75
Figure 4-23 Failed OR Registration ........................................................................................... 4-75
Figure 4-24 No Call (report 23) .................................................................................................. 4-75
Figure 4-25 In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23).............................. 4-75
Figure 4-26 No IRS Data (report 23 activated) .......................................................................... 4-76
Figure 4-27 FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated) ......................................................... 4-76
Figure 4-28 No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated) .............................................. 4-77
Figure 4-29 Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND) ............................................................ 4-78
Figure 4-30 Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled) ......................................................... 4-78
Figure 4-31 Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated) .................................. 4-79
Figure A-1 ORs ............................................................................................................................A-1
Figure A-2 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map ..........................................A-2
Figure A-3 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps ....................................................A-3
Figure A-4 Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map ...............................................................A-4
23-15-30
TC-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications ................................... 1-5
Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics .............. 1-8
Table 1-3 Inertial Type Labels .................................................................................................. 1-12
Table 1-4 GNSS Type Labels ................................................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-5 Hybrid Type Labels................................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-6 AES ID Type Labels ................................................................................................. 1-14
Table 1-7 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations .............................................. 1-18
Table 1-8 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software ..................................................... 1-19
Table 2-1 Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes .................................................. 2-5
Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection .............................................. 2-8
Table 2-3 Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides ................................................................. 2-10
Table 2-4 Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ................................................. 2-25
Table 2-5 Priority Codes ........................................................................................................... 2-26
Table 3-1 Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications ........................................................ 3-5
Table 3-2 RF Parameters Definitions.......................................................................................... 3-6
Table 3-3 WOW Pin Wiring......................................................................................................... 3-7
Table 3-4 Configuration Pin Summary...................................................................................... 3-10
Table 3-5 System Pin Strapping ............................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-6 Call Light Activation Configuration Strapping ........................................................... 3-11
Table 3-7 Hookswitch Configuration Strapping......................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-8 Priority 4 Call Configuration Strapping...................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-9 Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit Voice ........................................................... 3-12
Table 3-10 RJ45 Wiring Details ................................................................................................ 3-13
Table 3-11 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects ................................................... 3-14
Table 3-12 CMU Strapping ....................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-13 MCDU Strapping..................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details............................... 3-20
Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details .......................... 3-23
Table 3-16 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details ......................... 3-26
Table 4-1 List of Required Test Equipment .............................................................................. 4-36
Table 4-2 List of Optional Test Equipment................................................................................ 4-36
Table 4-3 Remote Connection Cabling..................................................................................... 4-37
Table 4-4 Direct Connection Cabling ........................................................................................ 4-37
23-15-30
TC-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-5 Terminal Connection Settings .................................................................................. 4-39
Table 4-6 Menu 1 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-41
Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-42
Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-43
Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions.................................................. 4-45
Table 4-10 Menu 4 Item Descriptions ....................................................................................... 4-48
Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-49
Table 4-12 Menu 13 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-50
Table 4-13 Menu 14 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-51
Table 4-14 Menu 15 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-52
Table 4-15 Menu 21 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-52
Table 4-16 Menu 30 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-53
Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-57
Table 4-18 Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions ....................................................................... 4-59
Table 4-19 Report 21 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-60
Table 4-20 Test Setup Procedure............................................................................................. 4-61
Table 4-21 Post Test Procedure ............................................................................................... 4-61
Table 4-22 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification ............................................... 4-62
Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist ................................... 4-62
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation ....................................................................... 4-80
Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters......................................................................... 6-1
Table 6-2 User ORT Parameters ................................................................................................ 6-4
Table F-1 Status Word 1.............................................................................................................F-1
Table F-2 Bits 9 and 10 Positions ...............................................................................................F-2
Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits......................................................................................................F-3
Table F-4 Join/Leave Word Bits .................................................................................................F-5
Table F-5 BOP Option Defaults ..................................................................................................F-6
Table F-6 BOP Word Format ......................................................................................................F-7
Table F-7 GFI Definitions............................................................................................................F-8
Table F-8 Word Types ................................................................................................................F-8
Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses...........................................................................................F-9
Table F-10 Data Types .............................................................................................................F-10
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes ................................................................. G-1
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions ............................................................................. H-1
23-15-30
TC-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides the specifications, principles of operation, and information necessary to install
the:
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, 1252-A-3820-01
This document is divided into the following sections:
•
System Description
•
System Operation
•
Installation
•
Test and Fault Isolation
•
Maintenance and Repair
•
Configuring the Owners Requirements Table (ORT)
•
Appendix A: Inmarsat Satellite Beam Coverage
•
Appendix B: Troubleshooting Checklist
•
Appendix C: RJ45 Cable Termination Details
•
Appendix D: Installation Planning Checklist
•
Appendix E: Installation Checklist
•
Appendix F: CMU Messages
•
Appendix G: International Access and Country Codes
•
Appendix H: Inmarsat Cause Codes
•
Appendix I: CMC Messages
NOTE: An Illustrated Parts List is not included with this manual.
Only qualified avionics personnel who are knowledgeable in the technical and safety issues related
to the installation of aircraft communications equipment should perform the installation procedures
provided in this manual.
This manual includes general installation guidelines only; it is not intended to provide specific
procedures for every type of installation.
If necessary, the information in this manual will be revised. Before attempting the installation
procedures presented in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-to-date release of this
document.
NOTE: Depending on your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s software version and configuration, the
actual (live) system messages you see, such as dialog boxes and screen displays, may
differ slightly from the examples in this manual.
23-15-30
INTRO-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
1. Illustration of Equipment
Figure INTRO-1 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Figure INTRO-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
2. Product Terms and Conditions
As stipulated in the Terms and Conditions of Sale, which accompanied the Product, EMS
Aviation shall not at any time be liable for the activation, continuation, or cancellation of satellite
airtime services relating to the Product nor be responsible for any Product-related airtime or
network charges, however incurred. In the event EMS Aviation is charged network or airtime
fees relating to the customer’s use of the Product, the customer shall immediately upon
notification by EMS Aviation reimburse EMS Aviation in full for such charges.
3. Acronyms and Abbreviations
The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in this document.
AC
Access Concentrator
ac
Alternating Current
ACARS
Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System
ACP
Audio Control Panel
ACSE
Access Control and Signalling Equipment
ACU
Antenna Control Unit (also known as BSU or Driver)
AERO
Aeronautical
AES
Aircraft Earth Station
AMBE
Advanced Multi Band Excitation
23-15-30
INTRO-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Americas
Americas (satellite)
AMO
Approved Maintenance Organization
AOR-E
Atlantic Ocean Region-East
AOR-W
Atlantic Ocean Region-West
APAC
Asia-Pacific (satellite)
ATC
Air Traffic Control
AWG
American Wire Gauge
BGAN
Broadband Global Area Network
BITE
Built-In Test Equipment
BOP
Bit Oriented Protocol
bps
Bits per second
BRI
Basic Rate ISDN
BSU
Beam Steering Unit (also known as ACU or Driver)
C/No
Carrier-to-Noise
CCW
Counter Clockwise
CFDS
Centralized Fault Display System
CMC
Central Maintenance Computer
CMU
Communications Management Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW
Clockwise
dc
Direct Current
DITS
Digital Information Transfer System
DLNA
Diplexer/Low-Noise Amplifier
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
D-UART
Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
EIRP
Effect Isotropic Radiated Power
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
EST
Eastern Standard Time
EMEA
Europe / Middle East Africa (satellite)
FAA
Federal Aviation Authority
FET
Field-Effect Transistor
FMS
Flight Management System
FRLP
Forward Return Link Pair
FWD ID
Forward ID
GES
Ground Earth Station
GND
Ground
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System
HGA
High-gain Antenna
HPA
High Power Amplifier
HTML
Hyper Text Markup Language
Hz
Hertz
23-15-30
INTRO-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
I/O
Input/Output
ICAO
International Civil Aviation Organization
ICD
Interconnection Drawing
IMEI
International Mobile Equipment Identifier
IMSI
International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
IMN
Inmarsat Mobile Number
INS
Inertial Navigational System
IOR
Indian Ocean Region
IRS
Inertial Reference System
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISN
Inmarsat Serial Number
ISP
Inmarsat Service Providers
ISP
Internet Service Provider
JAA
Joint Aviation Authorities
kbps
Kilobits per Second
LAN
Local Area Network
LES
Land Earth Station
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LS
line select
LSB
Least Significant Bit
MA
Mechanical Steered Antenna
Mbps
Megabit per second
MCDU
Multipurpose Control Display Unit
MCU
Modular Concept Unit
MES
Mobile Earth Station
M-ISDN
Mobile Integrated Services Digital Network
MPDS
Mobile Packet Data Services
MPU
Maintenance Port Utility
ms
Millisecond
MSB
Most Significant Bit
MSN
Mobile Serial Number
MSN
Multiple Subscriber Number
MTSAT
Meteorological Satellite
NAT
Network Address Translation
NO
normally open
NT
Network Terminator
O&I
Outline and Installation Diagram
OA
Other Antenna
OCXO
Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OR
Ocean Region
ORR
Ocean Region Registration
23-15-30
INTRO-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
ORT
Owner Requirements Table
PAST
Person Activated Self Test
PC
Personal Computer (or laptop)
PIM
Passive Intermodulation
PN
Part Number
POR
Pacific Ocean Region
POST
Power On Self Test
POTS
Plain Old Telephone System
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PSTN
Public Switch Telephone Network
PTT
Push-to-Talk
RAM
Random Access Memory
REA
Responsible Engineering Authority
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
Radio Frequency Interference
RFU
Radio Frequency Unit
rms
root mean square
ROM
Read-only Memory
RTN
Return
Rx
Receive
S/T (ISDN) ISDN ‘S interface’ refers to the electrical interface between NT1 and NT2
devices, such as a PBX. ISDN ‘T interface’ refers to the electrical interface
between NT1 or NT2 and ISDN devices.
SBB
SwiftBroadband
SCM
SDU Configuration Module
SCPC
Single Channel per Carrier
SDI
Source/Destination Identification
SDU
Satellite Data Unit
SNAC
Single Network Access Code
SPID
Service Profile Identifier
STBD
Starboard
STE
Secure Terminal Equipment
STU
Secure Telephone Unit
TA
Terminal Adapter
TE
Terminal Equipment
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Tx
Transmit
USIM
Universal Subscriber Identity Module
VHF
very high frequency
VSWR
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WOW
Weight on Wheels
23-15-30
INTRO-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
WSC
Williamsburg SDU Controller
WSCI
Williamsburg SDU Controller Interface
4. Safety Advisories
Warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual provide the reader with the following information:
•
A WARNING describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could
cause injury or death.
•
A CAUTION describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could cause
damage to the equipment.
•
A NOTE provides supplementary information or explanatory text that makes it easier to
understand and perform procedures.
All personnel who install, operate, and maintain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and associated
test equipment must know and obey the safety precautions listed below. The procedures
provided in this manual assume that the person performing installation or maintenance tasks
is familiar with and obeys standard aviation shop and safety practices.
The general safety advisories include the following:
WARNING: TO AVOID RISK OF INJURY FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, DISCONNECT THE
POWER FROM THE TERMINAL DURING INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL.
WARNING: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS,
SUCH AS WEARING SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY
WHILE INSTALLING OR PERFORMING SERVICE ON THIS TERMINAL.
WARNING: ASSOCIATED SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT RADIATES
HIGH FREQUENCY RADIATION AND POSES A RADIATION HAZARD OF 1.6
GHZ. SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST EXERCISE CARE TO KEEP CLEAR OF
THE ANTENNA'S BEAM WHILE PERFORMING OPERATIONAL TESTS OR
INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURES.
DO NOT APPROACH WITHIN 8 FEET (2.5 METRES) OF THE ANTENNA
DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION).
DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION), MAKE SURE THAT
PERSONNEL ARE EXPOSED TO A MINIMUM OF ANY REFLECTED,
SCATTERED, OR DIRECT BEAMS.
CAUTION: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY TERMINAL FROM
WIRING. DISCONNECTING THE TERMINAL WITHOUT TURNING POWER
OFF MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS THAT CAN DAMAGE THE
TERMINAL.
23-15-30
INTRO-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT INCLUDES ITEMS THAT ARE ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. ESDS DEVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO DAMAGE BY EXCESSIVE LEVELS OF VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT.
THE LOW-ENERGY SOURCE THAT MOST COMMONLY DESTROYS ESDS
DEVICES IS THE HUMAN BODY, WHICH, IN CONJUNCTION WITH
NONCONDUCTIVE GARMENTS AND FLOOR COVERINGS, GENERATES
AND RETAINS STATIC ELECTRICITY. TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT ESDS
DEVICES, THE DEVICE AND EVERYTHING THAT CONTACTS IT MUST BE
BROUGHT TO GROUND POTENTIAL BY PROVIDING A CONDUCTIVE
SURFACE AND DISCHARGE PATHS. USE STANDARD INDUSTRY
PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP RISK OF DAMAGE TO A MINIMUM WHEN
TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT.
23-15-30
INTRO-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
INTRO-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section includes basic information about HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, and includes the following
sections:
•
Inmarsat System Overview
•
Equipment Overview
•
Equipment Specifications
•
System Interfaces
•
User Interfaces
•
Software Description
1. Inmarsat System Overview
This section provides an overview of the Inmarsat satellite communications system and
networks.
The satellite communication system includes global satellite networks, Land Earth Stations
(LESs), Ground Earth Stations (GESs), Aircraft Earth Stations (AESs), and Mobile Earth
Stations (MESs).
The LES/GES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the ground. These
numerous, international stations are responsible for routing voice and data calls from the
MES/AES to their destinations around the world.
The MES/AES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the aircraft. This
station includes the following components:
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Antenna subsystem
•
Cabin communications system
•
Analog connected telephones
•
Cockpit voice system
•
Other aircraft avionics
Figure 1-1 illustrates a simplified satellite communications system.
23-15-30
1-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 1-1 Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System
Satellite communication systems provide users with long-range voice and data communication
by accessing global satellite and ground communications networks.
Inmarsat is an international organization that operates and maintains multiple geostationary
satellites and satellite networks. Inmarsat networks provide services for aviation, shipping, and
land-mobile terminals. Inmarsat provides information about satellite beam coverage at
www.inmarsat.com.
Inmarsat’s I-3 satellites provide Aero H+ and Swift 64 services for aviation. The satellites
connect to ground telecommunication systems through the LES/GES. Each satellite is located
over an Ocean Region (OR)—the current OR names are:
•
Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)
•
Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)
•
Indian Ocean Region (IOR)
•
Pacific Ocean Region (POR)
23-15-30
1-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Inmarsat’s I-4 satellites provide SwiftBroadband (SBB) services and Aero H+ services. The
three I-4 satellites are:
•
Americas
•
EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa)
•
Asia-Pacific
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in conjunction with an ARINC 741/781 High-gain Antenna
(HGA), acts as an MES/AES. The combined system provides users with a data and voice
communications link to the satellite network and global telecommunications system.
2. Equipment Overview
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are scalable, high-speed data, satellite communications terminals
that provide world-wide voice and data services to aircraft through high-speed communication
links with the Inmarsat Satellite Network. HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals interface with ARINC
741/781-compatible antenna subsystems to communicate with the space segment of the
Inmarsat Satellite Network via L-band RF signals.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals communicate with various avionics equipment, such as the aircraft’s
IRS and CMU, to coordinate and access a wide range of services. The HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals also communicate with cabin and cockpit voice and data equipment to provide phone,
fax, Internet connection, and other services on board the aircraft.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals contain the following:
•
One channel card for Swift 64 or SBB services
•
One Classic Aero multi-channel channel card
•
Data input/output (I/O) card
•
High stability reference oscillator
•
Control processor card
•
High Power Amplifier (HPA)
•
SDU Configuration Module (SCM)
•
Universal (115 V ac 400 Hz / 28 V dc) power supply
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the following services:
•
Inmarsat Mobile Integrated Services Digital Network (M-ISDN) Single Channel Per Carrier
(SCPC) Service
•
Inmarsat Mobile Packet Data Services (MPDS) via PPPoE
•
Inmarsat Aero P, R, T channel data
•
Two channels of Inmarsat Aero C channel H+ voice
23-15-30
1-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Cockpit communications for air-to-ground calls using the MCDU, or the WSC
•
CEPT-E1
•
SwiftBroadband (SBB) packet-switched and circuit-switched services
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal contains a SCM that has four SIM card slots. Each slot (and
each SIM card) is associated with a specific channel. To use the SBB service, the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal obtains subscriber information from the SIM card installed in Slot 1. Slot 2 is
reserved for future use. Channel card two provides Classic services and as Classic services
do not require a SIM card, slots 3 and 4 are not used. Figure 1-2 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal SCM.
Figure 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals have four different types of ports that provide ISDN, CEPT-E1,
Ethernet, and Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) to users in the aircraft cabin. Although able
to support multiple configurations depending on user needs, the following constraints apply:
•
•
EURO ISDN S/T port supports:
•
In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz
Audio, or 64kbps Speech
•
In SBB mode, one channel of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz Audio, or
4kbps AMBE+2 Voice
10BASE-T port supports:
•
In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps data or MPDS through PPPoE
•
In SBB mode, up to 11 simultaneous packet-switched (PS) data calls and one
circuit-switched (CS) call
23-15-30
1-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
•
POTS supports:
•
In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of ISDN (speech) or 3.1kHz audio (fax)
•
In SBB mode, one channel AMBE+2 voice or 3.1kHz audio (fax)
CEPT-E1 is offered through the Aero-H+ service and offers 1 or 2 channels of voice
NOTE: Only one service type can be used at one time on aHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal channel.
Channel card 1 can support two channels of Swift 64 service when in this mode or
one channel of SwiftBroadband service.
3. Equipment Specifications
This section includes the physical and environmental characteristics of HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals.
Table 1-1 lists the physical characteristics and specifications for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Certification/related documents
ARINC characteristics
600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces,
December 12, 1998
Attachment 10 of the ARINC 704-7
RTCA documents
HSD-440 Terminal Software
RTCA/DO-160E, Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment,
July 29, 1997
RTCA/DO-178B Level D/E (For more information, refer
to "Software Specifications" on page 1-19)
Physical Size
Height
19.41 cm (7.64 in)
Width
26.09 cm (10.27 in)
Length
38.66 cm (15.22 in)
Weight
16.1 kg (35.5 lbs)
Mounting information
8-MCU Tray (per ARINC 600, 8-MCU LRU)
Maintenance requirements
No scheduled maintenance is required
Electrical specifications
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal AC input power
Voltage
Minimum:
92 V rms—min start voltage: 100V rms
Typical:
115 V rms
Maximum:
122 V rms
23-15-30
1-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)
Characteristic
Power consumption
Specification
Maximum:
460 W
NOTE: Of this power consumption, 400 W is dissipated
internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated
externally.
Frequency
Power Factor
Minimum:
360 Hz
Typical:
400 Hz
Maximum:
800 Hz
Leading:
>0.77
Lagging:
>0.62
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal DC input power
Voltage
Power consumption
Minimum:
22 V dc for startup, 20.5 V dc for operation
Typical:
28 V dc
Maximum:
33.2 V dc
Maximum:
460 W
NOTE: Of this power consumption, 400 W is dissipated
internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated
externally.
Power requirements
AC
115 V ac, 400 Hz nominal, @ 4 A (460 W maximum)
DC
+ 28 V dc @ 15.5 A (460 W maximum)
Wire gauge
DC power:
12 AWG
AC power:
20 AWG (hot lead), 12 AWG (cold lead)
Signals: Unless otherwise specified, use 22 AWG for all
signal wires
Ground requirements
ARINC 741
Circuit breakers
Install circuit breakers according to the maintenance
requirements of the aircraft.
Heating and cooling requirements
Cooling air
As per ARINC 600 Section 3.5.1.6 (220 kg/(kWhr)
Flow rate
88 kg/hr (194 lbs/hr) at air temperature 40ºC
Pressure drop
5 ± 3 mm (0.20 ± 0.12 in.) of H2O
Frequency band
Tx:
1626.5 to 1660.5 MHz
Rx:
1525.0 to 1559.0 MHz
Receive input impedance
50 ohms
Transmit output impedance
50 ohms
Transmit VSWR
2:1 maximum
External interfaces
External parameters
23-15-30
1-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)
Characteristic
Antenna gain (HGA)
Specification
Minimum:
12 dB
Maximum:
17 dB
Antenna to DLNA loss
Maximum:
0.3 dB
DLNA gain
Minimum:
53 dB
Maximum:
60 dB
DLNA noise
Maximum:
1.8 dB
DLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal total loss
Minimum:
6 dB
Maximum:
25 dB (Rx)
Minimum:
1 dB
Maximum:
2.5 dB (Tx) (including DLNA loss)
Maximum:
0.8 dB
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to
antenna loss
DLNA insertion loss
External digital interfaces
Control interface
up to three MCDU (speed configurable)
two CMUs
Multi-control bus
Top/Port and Starboard antenna bus
Top/Port and Starboard antenna mute
two IRS buses—second port speed configurable
RS-232 maintenance interface 19 200 kbps (For connection specification, refer to
(rear and front connector)
"Maintenance Port Interface" on page 1-17)
Ethernet user interface (2)
10BASE-T input and output for SCPC (Swift 64 Mobile
ISDN) and MPDS using Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE)
Used for placing PPPoE calls using the MPDS, SCPC,
SBB PS, SBB CS services
Controls BGAN secondary contexts via the side AT
handler
Provides status information to the client system using
SNMP
ISDN ()
ISDN S/T physical interface supporting up to six external
connections to Terminal Adapter (TA) or Terminal
Equipment (TE) devices
One ISDN interface to high-speed data services
POTS tip/ring interface (2)
POTS analog interface provides access to services over
Swift 64 or SBB
CEPT-E1
Provides priority 4 (public) calls to the cabin over the
Aero H+ service
4-Wire interfaces
Providing cockpit voice services through the audio
control panel over Aero-H+ services
23-15-30
1-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-2 lists the RTCA/DO-160E environmental characteristics for HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals.
Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics
Section Environmental Condition
Category/Comment
Temperature and Altitude
4.5.1
Ground Survival Low
F2
4.5.1
Short Time Operating Low
F2
4.5.2
Operating Low Temperature
F2
4.5.3
Ground Survival High Temperature
F2
4.5.3
Short Term Operating High Temperature F2
4.5.4
Operating High Temperature
F2
4.5.5
In Flight Loss of Cooling
Z—Operate for 30 minutes @40ºC with 10W
Output RF power and 180 minutes @40C
without damage and without producing
smoke or fire
4.6.1
Altitude Test
F2
4.6.2
Decompression Test
A2—Modified to include an extra test of 4
hours at 10,000 ft.
4.6.3
Over Pressure Test
A2
Temperature Variation
Humidity
Operational Shock and Crash Safety
B—Modified to include an extra test after the
5th cycle
Vibration
S (CURVE B, C)—equipment exposed to 1
hour curve C (unpowered) prior to testing
with curve B.
Explosive Atmosphere
E—Modified to test at 0 ft and 41000 ft.
10
Waterproofness
11
Fluids Susceptibility
12
Sand and Dust
13
Fungus Resistance
14
Salt Spray
15
Magnetic Effect
16
Power Input
16.5
Power Input (ac)
A(WF)H
16.5.1.1 Normal Operating Conditions
A(WF)H
16.5.1.2 Voltage Modulation
A(WF)
16.5.1.3 Frequency Modulation
A(WF)
16.5.1.4 Momentary Power Interruptions
A(WF)
16.5.1.5 Transient/Voltage Surge—Normal
A(WF)
23-15-30
1-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics
Section Environmental Condition
Category/Comment
16.5.1.6 Normal Frequency Variation, 360 Hz to A(WF)
800 Hz
16.5.1.7 DC Content
A(WF)
16.5.1.8 Voltage Distortion
A(WF)
16.5.2.1 Abnormal Operating Condition
A(WF)
16.5.2.2 Abnormal Frequency and Voltage
Condition
A(WF)
16.5.2.3 Transient/Voltage Surge—Abnormal
A(WF)
16
Power Input (dc)
16.6
Normal Operating Conditions
16.6.1.1 Emergency Operation
16.6.1.1 Ripple Voltage
16.6.1.3 Momentary Power Interruptions
16.6.1.4 Normal Surge Voltage
16.6.2.1 Abnormal Operating Conditions
16.6.2.3 Momentary Undervoltage Operation
A (No damage)
16.6.2.4 Abnormal Surge Voltage
16.7.1
Current Harmonic Emissions from
Loads (ac)
A(WF)H
17
Voltage Spike
A—600 V, and repeated at 1000 V
18
Audio Frequency Conducted
Susceptibility
Power Input (115 V ac)
K(NF)
Power Input (28 V dc)
Induced Signal Susceptibility (ac)
ZW
Induced Signal Susceptibility (dc)
ZC
20
Radio Frequency Susceptibility
RR
21
Emission of RF Energy
22
Lightning Induced Transient
Susceptibility
A3J33
23
Lightning Direct Effects
24
Icing
25
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
A —Modified to apply 4kV to all connector
pins connecting to other equipment
26
Fire Flammability
C—Modified to include compliance with 14
CFR (FAR) 25.853a and 25.869(a) including
amendment 25-72
19
23-15-30
1-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
4. System Interfaces
This section briefly describes the external HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal system interfaces required
to control, monitor, maintain, and supplement the terminal. "Installation" on page 3-1 provides
a detailed description of interface connections.
Figure 1-3 shows the system interfaces of the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal.
Figure 1-3 HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal Interfaces
A. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC)
The CMC can include a video display system and keyboard or it can interface with a
separate multi-purpose control display system, such as an MCDU. The HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal supports CMC interfaces defined in ARINC 741 Part 1 Appendix 1, with minor
customization as required.
The CMC receives BITE data using the standard ARINC 429 maintenance words from
all subsystems attached to it. In turn, the CMC broadcasts data, such as time, date, flight
number, flight phase, and aircraft ID, that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals attached to it
can use to log events.
The CMC enables you to query the equipment attached to it for BITE data and control
the systems attached to it.
23-15-30
1-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
For more information about using the CMC, refer to the CMC manufacturer’s
documentation.
B. Source Destination Identification (SDI)
The SDI is strapped to indicate the installation type.
C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSI
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses two 24-bit IDs called Forward/Return Link Pairs
(FRLPs) for the Swift 64 service: a Forward ID (FWD ID) and a Return ID (RTN ID). The
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal reads the FWD ID from the EEPROM and performs a look-up
for the RTN ID. The terminal obtains the second FRLP from the table based on the first
FRLP. For security reasons, each assembly contains an encrypted look-up table with the
whole addressing space assigned to the product by Inmarsat. To minimize the risk of
unauthorized use of its contents, the table is not accessible to the user.
The ISN consists of the type approval number and the FWD ID address. Each FRLP is
associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs), which are the numbers that a user
dials from the ground to reach a terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each
of the service types (for example, data or voice).
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides IMEI and IMSI for SBB. The IMEI identifies the
equipment type to the network . The equipment types identity is hard coded in the
equipment. The IMSI identifies the subscriber. This identity is contained within the USIM
housed in the SCM.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides two ways to define the ICAO ID—by strapping
or over the secondary IRS bus. You can select strapping or the IRS bus as the source
of the ICAO ID by the secure ORT parameter ICAO CODE SOURCE.
NOTE: If the ICAO address source is set to the IRS bus, the secondary IRS type ORT
parameter must be set to AES ID.
The 24-bit ICAO ID forms part of the Inmarsat Serial Number (ISN).
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
number for access to SBB services. The IMSI is stored in the terminal’s SIM card, and
is printed on the SCM. Register your IMSI with your service provider to begin using SBB
services.
D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin Wiring
WOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground or in the air, and are used for
flight data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is not
required. However, EMS Aviation recommends wiring the WOW discretes if you plan to
load software while the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is installed in the aircraft.
WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status if the Inertial Reference System
(IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the CMC is not providing valid
data.
Note 40 of the ARINC 741 specification documentation defines the requirement for WOW
data.
23-15-30
1-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
E. IRS ARINC 429 Interface
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two IRS inputs and three types of labels:
•
Inertial
•
GNSS
•
Hybrid
Table 1-3, Table 1-4, and Table 1-5 list the labels for both primary and secondary IRS
inputs.
NOTE: The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not process the equipment ID label.
Table 1-3 Inertial Type Labels
Label Type
Priority
Name
Label
Latitude
N/A
AIRCRAFT_LATITUDE
310
Longitude
N/A
AIRCRAFT_LONGITUDE
311
Ground speed
N/A
AIRCRAFT_GROUND_SPEED
312
True track
N/A
AIRCRAFT_TRUE_TRAK
313
True heading
N/A
AIRCRAFT_HEADING
314
Pitch angle
N/A
AIRCRAFT_PITCH
324
Roll angle
N/A
AIRCRAFT_ROLL
325
Altitude
N/A
AIRCRAFT_ALTITUDE
361
Other
N/A
EQUIPMENT_ID
377
Table 1-4 GNSS Type Labels
Label Type
Priority
Name
Label
Latitude
N/A
GNSS_LATITUDE
110
Longitude
N/A
GNSS_LONGITUDE
111
Ground speed
N/A
GNSS_GROUND_SPEED
112
True track
N/A
GNSS_TRUE_TRAK
103
Altitude
GNSS_ALTITUDE_370
370
GNSS_ALTITUDE_76
76
N/A
GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD
273
N/A
HDOP_WORD
101
N/A
EQUIPMENT_ID
377
Other
23-15-30
1-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-5 Hybrid Type Labels
Label Type
Latitude
Priority
Name
Label
HYBRID_LATITUDE
254
GNSS_LATITUDE
110
HYBRID_LONGITUDE
255
GNSS_LONGITUDE
111
HYBRID_GROUND_SPEED
175
GNSS_GROUND_SPEED
112
HYBRID_TRUE_TRAK
137
GNSS_TRUE_TRAK
103
HYBRID_HEADING_132
132
AIRCRAFT_HEADING
314
Pitch angle
N/A
AIRCRAFT_PITCH
324
Roll angle
N/A
AIRCRAFT_ROLL
325
Altitude
HYBRID_ALTITUDE_261
261
GNSS_ALTITUDE_76
76
N/A
HDOP_WORD
101
N/A
GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD
273
N/A
EQUIPMENT_ID
377
Longitude
Ground speed
True track
True heading
Other
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the navigation data according to the following priority
rules:
•
For all labels other than Altitude, hybrid labels have the highest priority, followed by
GNSS and inertial labels.
•
For Altitude labels, the highest priority label is 370, followed by 261, 75, and 361.
•
If both buses have the same label and label type, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
control processor uses the 429 bus source of one of the labels as long as the label
is present and valid.
The secondary IRS port set to AES ID mode provides the ICAO ID. Table 1-6 lists the
AES ID type labels.
23-15-30
1-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 1-6 AES ID Type Labels
Name
F.
Label
ICAO Part 1
275
ICAO Part 2
276
Antenna Interface
The HSD-440 Mark 2 terminal interfaces to any mechanically-steered, conformal-array,
or phased-array antenna subsystems that are compatible with ARINC 741 and 781. The
antenna-pointing commands and status messages are communicated between the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and antenna subsystem over ARINC 429, multi-control,
top/port and/or starboard BITE and HPA mute buses, as defined in ARINC 741, Part 1.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support high gain antennas.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals do not support the third MCDU when a side-mount antenna
is installed.
G. CMU
Each HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can be connected to up to two ARINC 724B/758 CMUs.
A CMU is a general purpose instrument used to create and direct low data rate messages
to different ground-based systems, including airline headquarters and operations. The
CMU also provides access to Aero H/H+ PRT channels.
The CMUs operate in two modes: it can select from a number of Satellite Service
Providers rather than Inmarsat only, or it can operate with no preferred Satellite Service
Provider.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal exchanges information with the CMU over ARINC 429
interfaces. The default speed is low, but you can set the speed of the buses to high
through the ORT.
H. Antenna Subsystem RF Interface
The system RF parameters, such as cable losses and antenna gain, are delimited to
make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performance requirements are met. Refer
to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a definition of these parameters and their expected values.
5. User Interfaces
This section describes the HSD-440 interfaces that enable users to access Inmarsat services
and monitor the operation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
A. MCDU
The MCDU is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 739, which lets you
communicate with individual instruments on an aircraft, including the Flight Management
System (FMS), very high frequency (VHF) radio, and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You
can make air-to-air and air-to-ground voice calls with the MCDU. You can also use the
MCDU to answer ground-to-air and air-to-air voice calls.
23-15-30
1-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports three MCDUs.
B. WSC
The WSC is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 741 Part 2 Attachment
2F-42.1, which provides display functions similar to the MCDU. For more information
about the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2
Attachment 2F-42.1.
C. Remote Reset
The remote reset output provides an external reset function for the complete HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal. Pressing the momentary normally open (NO) switch resets the system's
processor-card circuitry.
The remote reset has the same function as pressing the test button on the front panel of
the terminal.
D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals connect to a variety of interface options. The physical
interface for ISDN BRI service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections
to user equipment.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide one ISDN S/T bus interface which is capable of
hosting up to six external physical connections to EURO ISDN devices.
The ISDN BRI S/T bus accesses only the Swift 64/SBB channel card. In SBB mode, the
interface provides one SBB circuit-switched connection. In Swift 64 mode, the interface
provides two Swift 64 circuit-switched connections. If the channel is busy or in-call, the
request for service is denied.
23-15-30
1-15
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 1-4 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN Connections
You can install RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area to facilitate connection to the
ISDN interface. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a description of the RJ45 connector
and cable termination.
E. Ethernet Data Interfaces
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two Ethernet data interfaces. Each Ethernet port
provides a 10 Mbps access with a 10BASE-T physical interface. The HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal data I/O controller takes the PPP data stream and directs it to the required port
on the channel card, depending on the type of service selected by the user. PPPoE is
required on the user equipment to allow the establishment of virtual connections to either
service. You can use the Ethernet ports for either Mobile ISDN or MPDS service when
operating in Swift 64 mode, or PS (background or streaming) or CS (Mobile ISDN) when
operating in SBB mode
The Ethernet interface also provides access to equipment monitoring functions through
SNMP, and to the side AT handler for control of secondary contexts in SBB
F.
POTS Tip/Ring Interfaces
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes two POTS analog interfaces that connect to the
Swift 64/SBB channel card. The default setting for POTS port 1 is 64 kbps Speech, and
the default setting for POTS port 2 is 3.1 kbps Audio, which is appropriate for fax calls.
23-15-30
1-16
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
G. CEPT-E1 Interface
The CEPT-E1 interface provides access to a maximum of two calls through Aero H+
voice services.
The CEPT-E1 interface connects to standard ITU or ARINC 746-compliant equipment.
Users can select the equipment through an ORT parameter.
H. Maintenance Port Interface
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is equipped with a maintenance port, located on the front
panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, with remote access also available through the
rear ARINC 600 connector. If the ports on both the front and back panels are connected,
the front-panel connection has priority and the back-panel connection does not function.
The maintenance port provides the physical connection to a password-protected MPU
that provides a system interface for users or service personnel who need to upgrade,
monitor, or troubleshoot the system.
The user connects to the maintenance port either through the maintenance 25-pin socket
D-Sub (DB25) connector on the front panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or through
a remote 9-pin socket D-Sub (DE9) connector via the ARINC 600 connector, as described
in "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.
A standard VT100 compatible terminal or computer (PC/laptop) running an emulator
program such as HyperTerminal©, ProComm (PCPLUS)©, or another serial
communication package provides the user interface to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MPU. Configure the connection as follows:
•
Bits per second—19200
•
Data bits—8
•
Parity—none
•
Stop bits—1
•
Flow control—none
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two different end user access levels within the
maintenance port architecture: End User and Field Representative.
(1) End User Access: Level 1
Password: menu
This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It
provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of
product support personnel.
(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2
Password: maint
This level is for trained installers and product support personnel. This access level
supports read and limited write capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear
faults, change satellite or LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM
parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions.
23-15-30
1-17
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
"Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 provides a detailed description of the two
levels of user access and the menus, report selections, functions, and system
diagnostic procedures of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
I.
Fault Indicator LED
Table 1-7 provides a description of the fault indicator LED functions.
Table 1-7 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations
LED
Signal
Label
LED1
Power On
Color
Green
Indication Description
Normal operation: on.
HPA output is greater than 30dBm: flashes at 1 Hz.
Power on: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supply voltage is
active. Self-test: flashes at 1 Hz alternately with the Fault
LED.
LED2
Fault
Red
Fault: Fault condition as described in "Fault Indicator LED"
on page 1-18.
Self-test: flashes once per second alternately with the Power
On LED.
A failure in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may be due to a number of fault conditions.
When fault condition is detected, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal activates a red, Fault
LED. Some of the potential fault conditions are:
•
CP RAM
•
CP Application code CRC
•
CC power up
•
CP D-UART
•
CP ARINC Chipset
•
PSU Power rail
•
Previous Power Up CP RAM
•
PSU Over temperature
•
OCXO Warmup
•
PA Over Current
•
PA Voltage Driver
•
PA Over temperature shutdown
•
PA 12VDC STATUS DISCRETE
•
SDU Configuration Module
•
CP Boot Code CRC
•
DIO Boot
23-15-30
1-18
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
VP RAM
•
VP Application Code CRC
•
VP Kernel
•
VP 4-Wire or POTS COM
•
VP 4-Wire #1
•
VP 4-wire #2
J. Self-Test
The self-test button activates the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal self-test.
The self-test button resets the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
performs a POST when the self-test button is pressed for over ten seconds.
K. Remote Status Panel (Optional)
In HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals, the outputs to the optional remote status panel
provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal—
they mirror the front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1) and Fault (LED2). Refer to
"Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements.
6. Software Description
This section describes the software specifications and operational software components of
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
A. Software Specifications
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software meets the following DO-178B standards:
•
SBB to Level E
•
Swift 64 to Level
•
Classic Aero voice and data to Level D
B. Operational Software Part Numbers
Table 1-8 provides a list of software part numbers for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
Table 1-8 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal Part Number
1252-A-3800-01
EMS Aviation Part
Number
LI-1252-38015
23-15-30
Description
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal firmware
assembly
1-19
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT)
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes an ORT that stores information relevant to the
operation of the terminal. The ORT is divided into two parts: secure and user. The secured
partition contains those items that are installation-dependent and crucial to the proper
operation of the satellite communication system. End users cannot modify these
parameters.
The user partition includes items that aircraft operators can modify, such as 4-wire
headset speaker volume.
You can use the EMS ORT Application to change ORT parameters and to create ORT
files on your computer. You can then load the ORT file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
through TFTP on an Ethernet connection. You can load the same ORT file to various
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals in your fleet. Section "2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using
the EMS ORT Application" on page 6-32 provides more information about the EMS ORT
Application.
23-15-30
1-20
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
SYSTEM OPERATION
This section provides basic information on registering and operating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals,
including the following sections:
•
Registering and Activating Terminals
•
Configuring Terminals
•
Using Terminals
1. Registering and Activating Terminals
Registering and activating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals has the following steps:
•
Preparing Terminal Information
•
Obtaining ICAO Addresses
•
Choosing Service Providers
•
Registering Terminals
A. Preparing Terminal Information
Before installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, obtain an ISN and identify the Swift 64
terminal type and service category.
(1) Obtaining ISNs
Honeywell provides ISNs for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal based on the intended
installation configuration. The last six digits of the ISN form the Forward ID.
When requesting ISNs, have the following information available:
•
End customer name, including contact information
•
The part number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Tail registration number, aircraft type, and serial number of the aircraft on which
the terminal is being installed
•
Serial number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals
•
Intended installation configuration mode
(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal Type
Inmarsat divides the band of frequencies assigned to Swift 64 high-speed data into
two separate categories: Category A and Category B. Category B frequencies are
restricted to those that do not overlap with Aero H/H+ frequency allocations. HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminals do not require restricted frequency allocations. Register HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminals as Category A systems.
23-15-30
2-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The Swift 64 terminal type for all modes of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals is 76HW07.
Currently, supported service types for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals operating Swift 64
are:
•
64 kbps speech
•
3.1 kHz audio
•
56 kbps data
•
64 kbps UDI
•
AMBE voice
•
MPDS
B. Obtaining ICAO Addresses
Obtain your ICAO address from your local aeronautical authority. Your service provider
will require this address when you register.
C. Choosing Service Providers
Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date list of Inmarsat Service Providers using the following
contact information:
Inmarsat
99 City Road, London
EC1Y 1AX
Tel: +44 20 7728 1000
Fax: +44 20 728 1044
Customer Care
Tel: +44 20 7728 1777
Fax: +44 20 7728 1142
Email: customer_care@inmarsat.com
Web address: www.inmarsat.com
D. Registering Terminals
Contact your Inmarsat service provider and ask for a registration for service activation of
Aircraft Earth Station form. With this form, you can register for Swift 64, SBB, and Aero H+
services. The services available depend on your service provider.
To complete the registration form you need the following information:
•
Customer information (address and contact information)
•
Service provider details (obtained from your ISP)
•
System and terminal information (terminal type, manufacturer, model number, serial
number of terminal)
•
ICAO 24 bit technical address for Aero H+ services
•
ISN for Swift 64 services
•
IMEI and IMSI (printed on the SCM label) for SBB services
23-15-30
2-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Aircraft information (tail number, fuselage/airframe number, manufacturer and model,
and country of registration)
•
List of services required (for example, Swift 64 Mobile ISDN, Aero H+ data-2, SBB
PS and SBB CS services)
NOTE: When requesting a logon class, you must request Class 3, even if your installation
does not support data services. The channel card software does not support
Class 2.
2. Configuring Terminals
This section provides basic information on how to configure HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals for
operation with user devices.
A. Setting up Airborne Networks
For information about setting up airborne networks that use Swift 64 and SBB services,
refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.
B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support connection to a multitude of user devices, allowing
the user to customize their system. The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide,
MN-1252-13005, provides more information about ISDN devices and services.
C. IMNs
IMNs are unique routing numbers that act similarly to telephone numbers. IMNs are
assigned by Inmarsat to each service type (64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, 56 kbps
data, and 64 kbps data).
When registering your system, request IMNs for each service-type device attached to
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on the Service Activation form. Although the service
provider may support an unlimited number of IMNs assigned to a particular system, the
number of physical connections available on a system defines the number of IMNs
supported.
NOTE: To get assigned extra or multiple IMNs per service type, you must request them
from your service provider when filling out your service registration and
application form.
The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information
about IMNs.
D. MSNs
MSNs act as identification and routing codes for user devices attached to the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal ISDN bus. MSNs identify the device on the system so that incoming
calls route to the appropriate device. Each device must be assigned an appropriate MSN
to identify to the Inmarsat system what type of service that device needs on outgoing
calls. The MSNs also provide routing information for incoming calls.
The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information
about MSNs.
23-15-30
2-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)
You can use the MPU to configure user-level parameters in the ORT. This feature will be
available in a future release.
F.
Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)
You can use the MPU to configure secure-level parameters in the ORT.
The Forward ID is a secure ORT parameter that you must configure in order to use
Swift 64 services. Refer to section "K: Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters" on
page 6-15.
G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)
can use the MPU to configure the ORT. Refer to "Configuring the Owners Requirements
Table (ORT)" on page 6-1 for instructions.
H. Understanding CMU Messages
The CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of ARINC
429 messages: Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both
types of communication are supported at the same time.
Appendix F: “CMU Messages” on page F-1 includes descriptions of the messages that
the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal.
I.
Configuring Swift 64 LES Access Codes
This section describes how to configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal with the LES
Access Codes provided by your Inmarsat service provider to support Swift 64 service.
Configure LES access codes only if you plan to use Swift 64 services. This configuration
is not required for SBB or classic services.
NOTE: You can remove the label that covers the LES Access Codes LEDs once you
have configured the LES Access Codes.
(1) General Overview
ISPs operate LESs. The ISPs are typically public telephone companies of the country
where the LES is located.
Using satellite communications antennas and up-and-downlink communications
equipment, the LES converts the space segment to a format compatible with public
and private telephone and data networks. Each satellite is associated with a number
of LESs that fall within its coverage.
Inmarsat assigns each LES an access code. These access codes are used by the
Inmarsat system to route calls to the correct OR satellite and LES.
NOTE: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are shipped with the factory default LES Access
Codes set to 0 (zero). All HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals must be configured
with the valid LES Access Codes provided by your ISP.
23-15-30
2-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPU
The LES Access Codes can be configured using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
You can access the MPU by connecting a computer running a VT100 terminal
emulation program to the RS-232 maintenance port on the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for connection settings
and cabling information).
NOTE: When configuring the LES Access Codes using the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal MPU, the application requests the input of a Secondary LES
Access Code. At the time of writing, Inmarsat has not implemented the
recognition of the secondary LES value in their systems. However, a valid
Secondary LES Access Code must be entered in the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal. The Secondary LES Access Code must be the same as the
Primary LES Access Code.
Inmarsat usually provides LES Access Codes for the ISPs providing Swift 64
services. Contact Inmarsat directly for an up to date list of LES and Swift 64 service
providers.
For more information, visit Inmarsat's Web site at www.inmarsat.com or contact their
Customer Care Service at:
Telephone:
+44 20 7728 1777
Fax:
+44 20 7728 1142
E-mail:
customer_care@inmarsat.com
Table 2-1 Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes
OR
Land Earth Station Operator
Country
AOR-E
AOR-W
IOR
POR
Telenor Satellite Services Inc.
USA
001
001
001
001
Stratos
UK/Canada
002
002
002
002
Stratos (Auckland LES)
New Zealand
Xantic (Burum LES)
Netherlands
012
012
012
012
Xantic (Perth LES)
Australia
(a) Equipment Required
You need the following to change the default LES Access Code in an HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal:
•
Computer
•
Terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal)
23-15-30
2-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(b) Connecting to the Maintenance Port
To connect to the maintenance port:
•
Connect a computer running a terminal emulation program to the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port, and then power up the system. (Refer
to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for detailed connection
information.)
(c) Changing LES Access Codes Using the Control Processor Software
To change all of the LES Access Codes simultaneously to the same LES Access
Code:
1. Connect to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port.
2. Type the password maint.
3. To navigate to Menu 3, press CTRL + N.
4. In Menu 3, press i.
5. Follow the application prompts, and enter the LES Access Code.
The Menu 3, option i configures the Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes
for all of the ORs to the same LES Access Code.
NOTE: In cases where the Service Provider requires different LES Access
Codes for different ORs, each LES Access Code must be programmed
individually using Menu 3, item P.
(d) Changing LES Access Codes on a Call-by-Call Basis
To change the LES Access Code on a call-by-call basis:
•
Dial the 901 prefix before your dial sequence:
901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code +
Telephone Number + POUND KEY
Example: 901 + 012 + 00 + 1+ 613+5551212 + #
NOTE: The call connects only if the service is authorized by the LES. To
obtain LES codes, call your Swift 64 service provider.
J. Removing the LED Label
A label covers the LES Access Codes LEDs. You can remove this label once you have
configured the LES Access Codes.
K. Activating Configurations
After you configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal parameters, you must rest the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using one of the following methods:
•
In Menu 2, press z
•
Cycle the power to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
When the reset or restart is completed, the configuration values and parameters are
activated.
23-15-30
2-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
L. Verifying Configurations
This section describes how to view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal configuration
parameters.
To view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT system configuration:
1. In Menu 3, press o.
The List ORT appears.
2. To scroll through the listing until you see a table of ORT ORs, press o.
The LES Access Codes are listed in this table.
3. Using Terminals
This section describes how to perform the following tasks:
•
Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls
•
Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface
•
Using Data Connections
•
Operating the MCDU
•
Operating the WSC
•
Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU
A. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls
Placing voice and fax calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an
international telephone call or entering a telephone number for dial-up networking data
calls. Like international telephone numbers, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
dialing-number-sequence includes different routing components or codes. Figure 2-1
illustrates the required order of the dialing components.
Figure 2-1 Dialing-Sequence Components
23-15-30
2-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Each dialing sequence component serves a different routing function:
•
Dial Code Prefix:
Use service-specific dial code prefixes when sending a fax or using analog modems,
or for overriding system defaults to force the system to request a specific service
type. Figure 2-1 uses the dial code prefix for 3.1 KHz audio service type (*82*). See
Table 2-2 for other dial code prefixes.
•
International Access Code:
The international access code for all airborne equipment is 00.
•
Country Code:
Use the Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) number assigned to the country
of your call destination.
•
Area Code (and City Code, if applicable):
Use the PSTN routing number assigned to the area (and if applicable, city) of your
call destination.
•
POUND SIGN (#):
To signal the system to send the call, at the end of the telephone dial string, press
or enter POUND SIGN (#). Certain devices using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may
not have the function to insert the POUND SIGN (#) at the end of the dialing
sequence. For those devices, additional dial code prefixes are required to override
the send command requirement. Refer to Table 2-3 for more information.
(1) Dial Code Prefixes
Although the system automatically selects the appropriate service types on outgoing
calls for ISDN devices, a dial code prefix is required to send a fax, identify an analogue
modem, or force the system to override the system defaults to select a specific service
type (see Table 2-2).
Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection
Service Type
Service Description
Dial Code Prefix
(Forces service
selection)
Swift 64 Prefixes
Speech 64 kbps
High-speed voice
3.1 kHz audio
Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE
*82*
56 kbps data
High-speed data
*85*
64 kbps data
High-speed data
*84*
23-15-30
*81* or none
2-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection (Continued)
Service Type
Service Description
Dial Code Prefix
(Forces service
selection)
SBB Prefixes
Speech 64 kbps
N/A
3.1 kHz audio
Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE
56 kbps data
High-speed data
*83*
64 kbps data
High-speed data
*84*
Speech
(AMBE+2)
*82* or none
*80* or none
The system requires the dial code prefix *82* for sending faxes or when using
analogue modems. It forces the system to request the required 3.1 kHz audio service
from the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network. If required, use the dial code
prefixes to override the system defaults for selecting specific service types. Dial code
prefixes for all service types require an asterisk (*) before and after the code number.
Other dial code prefixes provide system overrides required if you are using devices
that cannot add a POUND SIGN (#) to the dialing string or devices that are slow
dialing. Table 2-2 provides a description of the additional dial code prefixes used for
system overrides. Table 2-1 provides a list of the LESs and their associated codes.
23-15-30
2-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 2-3 Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides
Dial Code
Prefix
Reason for Override
Use this dial code prefix to override the default
LES/GES configured in the system.
This dial code prefix signals the system to
override the default LES/GES and use the
selected LES/GES instead. (See Figure 2-2
or contact Inmarsat for Swift 64 LES/GES
codes)
Use with fast (e.g. automated) dialing devices
that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN
to end the dialing sequence.
901 +
LES/GES
CODE
901 + LES/GES CODE +
International Code + Country Code +
Area Code + Telephone Number +
POUND KEY
901 + 002 + 00 + 1+ 613 +5551212
+ POUND KEY
902
902 + International Code + Country
Code + Area Code + Telephone
Number
902 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212
This dial code prefix signals the system to
send the call after a specified delay in user
input when the POUND SIGN cannot be
entered (about 4 seconds).
Use with slow (e.g. manual) dialing devices
that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN
to end the dialing sequence.
Example Dialing Sequence
903
This dial code prefix signals the system to
send the call after a specified delay in user
input (about 20 seconds).
903 + International Code + Country
Code + Area Code + Telephone
Number
903 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212
(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides a two-way link for aircraft-to-aircraft
communication. Calling aircraft-to-aircraft requires additional information. You need
to know the IMN of the device or service on the aircraft you are calling.
Figure 2-2 illustrates the Mobile-to-Mobile dialing sequence.
Figure 2-2 Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence
23-15-30
2-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal CEPT-E1 interface provides Cabin Telecommunication Unit
(CTU) access to two Aero-H+ 4800 bps AMBE voice calls simultaneously. Since the
CEPT-E1 interface shares the Aero H+ voice channels with the cockpit, CTU calls maybe
preempted from either the air or ground by higher priority calls.
Air-to-ground and ground-to-air calls over the CEPT-E1 interface are priority 4 (public)
calls.
For information on how to place a call over the CEPT-E1 interface, see the CTU
documentation.
C. Using Data Connections
For information about data connections, optimizing your airborne network and selecting
the service that best meets your needs, refer to the HSD High-speed Data Terminal
Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.
D. Operating the MCDU
This section provides information about the MCDU and its interfaces—output and input
ports, the screen, and the keyboard.
(1) Output Ports
The MCDU transfers its identification and commands to the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal using 32 bit words and a 12-14.5 kbps output port, as defined in ARINC
Specification 429, Digital Information Transfer System (DITS).
(2) Input Ports
The MCDU receives identification information and displays data from individual
subsystems using seven input ports, as defined by ARINC Specification 429. Ports
1 and 2 are reserved for FMSs, and they operate at 100 kbps. Ports 3 to 7 are
available for the MCDU to communicate with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and they
operate at 12-14.5 kbps.
(3) Screen
The MCDU displays all data on the screen, as shown in Figure 2-3.
23-15-30
2-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM
1L
2L
5 * MAKE
MA I N
MENU
1R
S A T
A V A I L A B L E
P R I
CA L L
2R
0 0 1 6 1 3 5 6 0 1 2 4 3
3L
3R
S A T
4L
I N C O M I N G
9 * A N S WE R
CA L L
C A L L
REJ ECT *
4R
P U B L I C
5L
11
6L
13 < S U B M E N U
D I RECTORY >
5R
6R
Figure 2-3 MCDU Screen
The top of the screen displays the title of the menu on the screen. The bottom of the
screen (Line 14) is the scratchpad that displays information that you enter on the
keyboard.
The MCDU has six buttons on each side of the screen that activate MCDU functions.
Figure 2-3 displays these buttons on the left and right sides of the screen. When the
functions corresponding to a button are available, the function’s name appears
beside the button—for example, in Figure 2-3, ANSWER CALL and REJECT (a call)
are available functions for the incoming call on SAT 2.
Other lines on the MCDU screen display information relevant to the function or status
of the HSD-440. In Figure 2-3, line 6 displays the phone number the HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal will dial when the user presses the MAKE CALL button, and the number
3 under PRI in row 5 indicates that the priority of the outgoing call is 3.
(4) Keyboard
The MCDU’s keyboard includes a set of numeric keys and a set of alphabetic keys,
both of which you can use to enter data into the MCDU.
The keyboard may include preset keys, such as the following:
•
The IDX or MAIN MENU key: this key returns you to the MCDU’s main menu.
•
The CLR key: this key clears any text you type into the scratchpad.
•
The NEXT PAGE key: this key brings up the next page of a menu if one is
available.
(5) Special Symbols
Because of space constraints on the screen, the MCDU uses a number of special
symbols to indicate actions:
•
< and > appear at the far left or right to indicate that another menu page is
available in that direction.
23-15-30
2-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
* appears at the far left or right to indicate that pressing that key results in an
action.
•
NUMBER/NUMBER appears to tell you which page out of how many pages you
are viewing. For example, 1/3 would appear when you are on page 1 of 3 pages
in total.
•
[ and ] appear around empty data fields where you can enter data. However,
entering data is not mandatory in these fields.
(6) Navigating the MCDU
The MCDU includes a number of menus, as shown in Figure 2-4. There are four
category pages in the address book and up to 25 pages (100 phone numbers) for
each category.
NOTE: The SATCOM CH 2 STAT menu is not present when the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal is operating in SBB mode.
Figure 2-4 MCDU Menus
23-15-30
2-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
This section will help you perform the following tasks:
•
Viewing Flight Information
•
Logging On and Off
•
Viewing Channel Information
•
Configuring Headsets
(7) Viewing Flight Information
You can view the flight identification from the MCDU.
To view flight information:
1. On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
S A T COM
L O G - O N
SUBMENU
S T A T E
L OGGE D - O F F
< L OG - ON
A E R O
C H A N N E L
H S D
C H A N N E L
ST ATUS>
ST ATUS>
F L T
1 2 3 4 5
I D
MA I NT ENANCE >
RETURN>
You can view the following information from this screen:
•
Flight identification on the line below FLT ID
(8) Logging On and Off
You can use the MCDU to initiate a manual or automatic logon from the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal to the satellite network.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boot-up logon mode is specified in the
Logon/Handover Policy in the ORT. You can set this parameter to automatic or
manual. After the terminal has finished the boot-up process, you can use the MCDU
to log off (from an automatic logon) or to initiate a manual (constrained) logon.
During an automatic logon, the system selects the most appropriate GES depending
on HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal location.
During a manual logon, you must select the GES. Even if the ORT parameter is
configured for automatic logon, you can still constrain the terminal to logon using a
particular GES.
23-15-30
2-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(a) Viewing the Log Status
The log status defines whether the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently logged
on or logged off. The logon status can be:
•
Logged-Off—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off.
•
Logged-Off Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log on
manually but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all problems
for the logon to continue.
•
Logged-Off Rejected—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on and
a second logon attempt is made. The second attempt fails and the status
is Logged-Off Rejected.
•
Logging-On Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log
on automatically but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all
problems for the logon to continue.
•
Logged-On Constrained—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on
manually.
•
Logged-On Auto—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on
automatically.
•
Logging-off—TheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging
off.
•
Logging-on—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging
on.
To view the log status:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
The logon state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE.
You can view additional details about the logon, including the GES and satellite
name. To view additional logon details:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.
The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON screen appears as shown below. The logon
state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE. You can also view the GES
name, satellite name, signal level, antenna type, azimuth and elevation, and
8-digit ICAO ID.
NOTE: If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, the LOG-OFF option
is not available. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on, the
AUTO LOG-ON option is not available.
(b) Initiating an Automatic Logon
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on automatically, it selects an
appropriate GES and satellite based on its position.
23-15-30
2-15
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To log on automatically:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.
The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears.
3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to AUTO
LOG-ON.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on and the logon state is LOGGED-ON
AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO LOG-ON key is not available if the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal is already logged on.
(c) Selecting a GES (Initiating a Constrained Logon)
You can constrain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to logon using a particular GES.
If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, selecting a GES initiates a
constrained log on (logon state is LOGGED-ON CONSTRAINED).
If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is already logged on and you select a new GES,
the MCDU displays the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page and automatically logs
off the old GES and logs on to the new GES. This also results in a constrained
logon.
To select a GES:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON.
The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears.
3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to GES SEL.
The GES SELECTION page appears.
23-15-30
2-16
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
GES
S E L EC T I ON
1 / 3
A O R W
* AUS S AGUE L
/ 0 0 5
A O R W
* E I K
/ 0 0 2
A O R E
* AUS S AGUE L
/ 1 0 3
A O R E
* E I K
/ 1 0 4
P O R
* PERTH
/ 2 0 5
RETURN>
4. To select a GES, press the button next to the GES name.
A logon confirmation (LOG-ON) appears at the bottom of the screen.
5. To log on to the new GES, press the key next to LOG-ON.
(d) Logging Off
You can use the MCDU to initiate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logoff sequence.
To log off:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. Press the key next to LOG-OFF.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs off.
(9) Viewing Channel Information
There are three Aero channels and two Swift 64 channels, or one SwiftBroadband
channel, available with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can use the MCDU to
view the following information about each of the channels:
•
Logon status (Aero channels only)—Logon status may be Valid or Invalid.
•
ORR status (Swift 64 channels only)—Ocean Region Registration (ORR) status
may be Valid or Invalid.
•
Attach status (SwiftBroadband channels only)—Attach status may be Valid or
Invalid.
•
Call Termination Code (CALL TERM)
•
Transmitter Effect Isotropic Radiated Power (TX EIRP)
•
Receiver carrier-to-noise ratio (RX C/NO)
•
Service type—Possible service types are:
•
AERO P/R/T
•
AERO VOICE
•
SWIFT64
23-15-30
2-17
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
SBB (SwiftBroadband)
•
Number of bits transmitted per second (TX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB
background services, the number of bits being transmitted per second is
expressed in kilobits per second (kbps).Otherwise, the number of bits transmitted
is zero.
•
Number of bits received per second (RX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB
background services, the number of bits being received per second is expressed
in kilobits per second (kbps). Otherwise, the number of bits received is zero.
•
Service information (CONNECTED)—For Aero service, service information
includes the GES name and number. For GAN (Swift 64) service, service
information includes the service provider number and name description. For SBB
service, no information is provided.
•
Satellite ID (SAT)—Satellite ID includes the index number of each satellite, a
mnemonic and abbreviated alphanumeric description, and the spot beam that
theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently using.
(a) To view information about an Aero channel:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to AERO CHANNEL STATUS.
The SATCOM AERO STATUS page appears.
S A T COM
AERO
ST ATUS

3. On the SATCOM AERO STATUS page, press the key next to a channel.
The SATCOM CH STAT page appears. (MCDU pages for Channel 3 and
Channel 4 are shown below.)
23-15-30
2-18
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM
CH
ST AT
CHAN
SYNC
L O G O N
WA I T
FOR
C A L L
T E R M
T X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
T X
E I R P
R X
K B P S
1 3 . 5
R X
0 . 0 0
C / N 0
C O N N E C T E D
5 0 . 0
E I K
S E R V
AERO
T Y P E
S A T
P / R / T
AORE
B 5
RETURN>
S A T COM
CH
ST AT
L O G O N
VA L I D
C A L L
T E R M
T X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
T X
E I R P
R X
0 . 0
R X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
C / N 0
C O N N E C T E D
0 . 0
S E R V
AERO
E I K
T Y P E
VO I CE
S A T
AORE
B 5
RETURN>
(b) To view information about a Swift 64 channel:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL
STATUS.
The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.
23-15-30
2-19
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM
HSD
ST ATUS

3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to a Swift 64
channel.
The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.
S A T COM
O R R
CH
ST AT
S T A T
REG I S T ER I NG
C A L L
T E R M
T X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
T X
E I R P
R X
1 4 . 0
R X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
C / N 0
C O N N E C T E D
5 3 . 0
S E R V
L ES
T Y P E
SW I F T 6 4
S A T
AORE
B 5
RETURN>
(c) To view information about a SBB channel:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL
STATUS.
The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.
23-15-30
2-20
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM

3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to the SBB channel.
The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.
S A T COM
CH
ST AT
A T T A C H
YES
C A L L
T E R M
T X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
T X
E I R P
R X
2 0 . 0
R X
K B P S
0 . 0 0
C / N 0
C O N N E C T E D
7 2 . 2
S E R V
T Y P E
BGAN
S A T
AORE
B 5
RETURN>
(10)Viewing Maintenance Information
The maintenance page provides information about:
•
Terminal status
•
Terminal part numbers
(a) Viewing Terminal Status
To view the terminal status:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.
The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.
23-15-30
2-21
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM
MA I NT ENANCE
ST ATUS
T E R M I N A L
T R A N S M I T
OK
NORMA L

The maintenance menu displays the following information:
•
Terminal status on the line below TERMINAL—Terminal status may be
OK or FAULT.
•
Transmit status on the line below TRANSMIT—Transmit status may be
NORMAL or INHIBITED.
•
Air/Ground status on the line below RESET SATCOM SYSTEM—When
set to ON GROUND, the system is on the ground and can be reset.
When set to NOT AVAIL – IN AIR, the system is in the air and cannot
be reset.
(b) Viewing Terminal Part Numbers
To view terminal part numbers:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.
2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.
The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.
3. On the SATCOM MAINTENACE page, press the key next to PART
NUMBERS.
The SATCOM PART NUMBERS page appears.
The part numbers menu displays the following information:
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal part number and version
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software load and version
•
8-digit ICAO ID
•
3-digit HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal serial number
•
6-digit (hexadecimal) Forward IDs (FWD ID 1 and FWD ID 2)
23-15-30
2-22
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
15-digit IMSI number
(11) Configuring Headsets
To configure the headset(s):
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU.
The SATCOM SUBMENU appears.
2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE.
The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.
3. Press the key next to HEADSET CONFIG.
The SATCOM HEADSET CONFIG page appears.
NOTE: Toggle between the two 4-wire headsets by pressing the key next to
SAT. When you toggle between headsets, the speaker, microphone,
sidetone, and noise values are displayed for that headset.
S A T COM
HEADSET
CON F I G
S A T
* DEFAUL T
S P E A K E R
* DWN
5 0
UP *
M I C R O P H O N E
* DWN
7 0
UP *
S I D E T O N E
* DWN
5 0
UP *
N O I S E
* DWN
- 5 0
UP *
RETURN>
4. To increase or decrease the speaker, microphone, sidetone, and noise insertion
levels, press the keys next to DWN and UP. When you change either of the levels,
a SAVE label appears at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: The speaker, microphone, and sidetone values move up and down by
5, and the noise value moves up and down through values -60, -50, -40,
and OFF.
NOTE: To reset all the settings to the default values, press the key next to
DEFAULT. Default values are speaker (50), microphone (70), sidetone
(50), and noise (-50).
5. To save the new levels, press the key next to SAVE.
E. Operating the WSC
The WSC performs the same functions as the MCDU. For more information on operating
the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2
Attachment 2F-42.1.
23-15-30
2-23
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
F.
Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU
This section provides instructions for making calls with the MCDU and 4-wire voice
services available in the aircraft’s cockpit. The cockpit communications system operates
with one or two headsets in the aircraft’s cockpit, depending on the operational mode.
(1) Modes of Operation
The cockpit communication services are configured in one of two modes of operation
before installation: Latched mode and Push-to-Talk (PTT) mode. These
configurations are strapped at the terminal and cannot be changed without removing
and rewiring the terminal.
In PTT mode, a telephone number can be dialed only using the MCDU keys, not with
the switches on the cockpit communication console. In Latched mode, a call to a
telephone number loaded into the MCDU can be initiated using the switches on the
Audio Control Panel (ACP), and calls can be answered and ended with the switches
or the MCDU buttons.
(2) Accepting and Making Calls
You can accept and make voice calls using
•
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the MCDU, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit
headsets
or
•
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the WSC, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit
headsets.
(a) Automatic Call Handling Priority and Preemption
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal automatically disconnects (preempts) a call if it
receives a higher priority call when both classic Aero channels are in use. When
two calls are in progress, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower
priority call. If both calls are the same priority, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
preempts the last call received.
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower priority call and
connects the higher priority call, the caller in the aircraft does not receive a notice.
The new, high priority call starts as soon as the HSD-440receives it.
(b) Accepting and Making Calls
You can use the MCDU and ACP to accept calls, make air-to-ground calls, and
make air-to-air calls. You can manually dial calls or dial previously saved
telephone numbers from the MCDU’s telephone directory.
The way in which you can accept or make calls depends on the mode in which
your 4-wire cockpit headset is strapped (PTT mode or Latched mode) and the
Cockpit Outgoing Call Pre-Select ORT parameter. Refer to "Configuring
Outgoing Call Pre-Selection" on page 6-24.
The combination of lights and chimes that alert you to an incoming call depends
on the way in which the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Cockpit Call Signalling Mode
ORT parameter is set. Refer to C. “Configuring Cockpit Communication
Parameters” on page 6-5. If you use the alternate output discretes, the call
discrete outputs are driven as per Table 2-4 instead of using lights and chimes.
23-15-30
2-24
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 2-4 Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Audio Discrete
Channel State
Digital Audio
System Light
Digital Audio
System Chime
Alternate Discrete
Discrete 1
Discrete 2
On hook
Off
Off
Off
Off
Call initiated/connected
1 Hz flash
Off
On
Off
Call answered
Steady or 3 Hz flash
Off
Off
On
Incoming call
1 Hz flash
Single-stroke
On
On
To accept the call:
•
On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to ANSWER
CALL.
•
Assert the Place/End switch.
•
Assert the VoiceMic On switch.
or
•
In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.
•
In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and press the
PTT switch.
(c) Manual Dialing Calls
Making calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an
international telephone call. Air-to-ground telephone numbers include an
international access code, country code, and area code.
International access codes and country codes are shown in Appendix G:
“International Access and Country Codes” on page G-1.
To manually dial a call:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.
The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.
23-15-30
2-25
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
S A T COM
D I RECTORY
C A T EGOR Y 0 1
C A T EGOR Y 0 3 >
C A T EGOR Y 0 2
C A T EGOR Y 0 4 >
S A T
[ M A N U A L
D I A L ]
P R I
RETURN>
2. To select a channel, on the SATCOM DIRECTORY page, press the key next
to SAT (the channel number).
3. To set the priority for your call using Table 2-5, type the priority number on
the MCDU scratchpad and press the key next to PRI (the priority value).
Table 2-5 Priority Codes
Call priority
Description
Emergency—used for distress or urgent calls
Operational-High—used for Flight Safety communications
Operational-Lo—used for Regularity of Flight, Meteorological or
Administrative communications
Non-Operational—used for Non Safety of Flight or public phone
call (cabin) communications
4. To dial the call, type the phone number into the scratchpad and press the
key next to MANUAL DIAL.
With Pre-Select Mode disabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears and
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal initiates the call. With Pre-Select Mode
enabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears.
•
To start the call with Pre-Select mode enabled, in either Latched or PTT
mode, press the key next to MAKE CALL.
•
To start the call in PTT mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the ACP,
assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.
or
assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and then press the PTT switch.
•
To start the call In Latched mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the
ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.
23-15-30
2-26
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(d) Making Calls from the Telephone Directory
You can make voice calls from the numbers you have saved in the MCDU’s
telephone directory.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MCDU enables you to keep four separate
telephone books for different uses. By default, these books are called Category
01, Category 02, Category 03, and Category 04. You can customize the directory
names in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT.
To make a call from the telephone directory:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.
The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.
S A T COM
D I RECTORY
C A T EGOR Y 0 1
C A T EGOR Y 0 3 >
C A T EGOR Y 0 2
C A T EGOR Y 0 4 >
S A T
[ M A N U A L
D I A L ]
P R I
RETURN>
2. To access the phone numbers in a directory, press the key next to the
directory name.
The selected directory appears.
C A T EGOR Y
M A K E
1 / 1
C A L L :
S A T
0 1 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 1 1 1 1
P R I
* 0 1 - L ABE L 1
0 1 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 2 2 2 2
* 0 2 - L ABE L 2
* SORT
[ ]
RETURN>
23-15-30
2-27
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
3. To dial or load a telephone number, press the key next to the number.
With Pre-Select mode disabled, the MCDU main menu page appears and
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal starts the call.
With Pre-Select mode enabled, the MCDU main menu page appears.
S A T COM
S A T
* MAKE
MA I N
MENU
A V A I L A B L E
P R I
CA L L
0 0 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 1 1 1 1
S A T
I N C O M I N G
* A N S WE R
CA L L
C A L L
REJ ECT *
P U B L I C
< SUBMENU
D I RECTORY >
4. To dial the telephone number with Pre-Select mode enabled:
•
In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU, press the key next to MAKE
CALL.
or
•
In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or
PLACE/END CALL 2 switch or close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch, and
then press the PTT switch.
or
•
In Latched mode, on the ACP, close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.
(e) Ending Calls
To end the call:
•
In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU main menu, press the key next to
END CALL.
or
•
In PTT or Latched mode, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or
PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.
or
•
In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the VoiceMic On switch for the active
call.
(f) Saving Telephone Numbers in the Telephone Directory
You can save telephone numbers to the MCDU’s telephone directory to use later,
and you can dial telephone numbers from the telephone directory.
23-15-30
2-28
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To save telephone numbers to the telephone directory:
1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY.
The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.
2. To view telephone numbers stored in a directory, press the key next to the
directory name.
The directory listing appears.
3. Navigate to the page with the last entry in the directory, type the phone
number into the scratchpad, and then press the key next to the empty
brackets on the MCDU screen.
The telephone number appears in the brackets.
4. Type the name associated with the telephone number and then press the
key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.
5. Type the priority associated with the telephone number and then press the
key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.
6. To save the number, press the key next to SAVE. To cancel the new entry,
press the key next to CANCEL.
NOTE: Press the key next to SORT to alphabetically sort the entries in the
directory. Entries remain sorted even after the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal is rebooted.
23-15-30
2-29
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
2-30
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
INSTALLATION
This section provides procedures to install HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals on an aircraft, including the
following sections:
•
Advisories
•
Pre-Installation Inspection
•
Mechanical Installation
•
Electrical Installation
•
Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test
•
Installation and Engineering Diagrams
1. Advisories
Read the safety advisories in the Introduction section on page INTRO–6 of this manual before
you begin installing the terminal.
2. Pre-Installation Inspection
Inspect all parts before you install any HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, to make sure that no damage
occurred during shipping.
A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment
•
Unpack the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals from the shipping containers.
•
Verify that the part number displayed on the shipping box and equipment component
matches the model and part number ordered. If components are missing from the
shipment, contact the supplier or Honeywell Product Support immediately and report
the problem.
•
Visually inspect the terminal for any shipping damage. If any shipping damage has
occurred, contact the shipping carrier immediately and report the problem.
•
Check the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors for corrosion and damage. If
damage is noted, do not apply power to the terminal. Contact the supplier or
Honeywell Product Support immediately to report the problem.
B. Cabling Notes
Before proceeding with the installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, read all cabling
notes provided on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Interconnection and Contact
Assignment drawings at the end of this section.
23-15-30
3-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(1) Cabling
When installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow the cabling requirements listed
below:
•
Maximum recommended length for Ethernet cables is 50 feet.
•
LAN cables must meet flammability, TIA/EIA568-A CAT 5, requirements and
conform to ARINC 628 specifications.
•
Wire size recommendations:
•
For +28 V dc HOT (BP2), +28 V dc RTN GND (BP3), 115 V ac COLD (BP7),
and Chassis GND (BP8), use 12 AWG
•
For 115 V ac HOT (BP1), use 20 AWG
•
Unless otherwise specified, for signaling, use 22 AWG
(2) Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations
When installing HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, consider the following coaxial cable loss
requirements:
•
Transmit cable: maximum loss is 2.5 dB, including DLNA (typically <0.8 dB), as
per ARINC 741. In installations that use a high power relay, the high power relay
loss must be included.
•
Receive cable: minimum loss is 6 dB, maximum loss is 25 dB (including any
in-line attenuator), as per ARINC 741.
3. Mechanical Installation
This section contains the information required to plan the physical placement of HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminals. The Outline and Installation diagrams, shown in Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7,
illustrate the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
In typical aircraft installations, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assembly fits into standard ARINC,
8-MCU mounting trays.
A. Physical Placement
When selecting a location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, allow for adequate spacing
for the installation while providing reasonable access for servicing. Leave a minimum
gap of 0.5 inches between LRUs.
B. Environmental Requirements
The environmental requirements that must be considered during the physical placement
of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are based on the RTCA/DO-160E Environmental
Specifications detailed in "System Description" on page 1-1.
The mounting trays offer a number of fan configuration options depending on the physical
placement of the LRU in the aircraft.
(1) Heating and Cooling
Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for a complete listing of the
RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Specifications for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
23-15-30
3-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
When selecting an installation location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, consider
the heating and cooling requirements listed below:
•
Power Dissipation (AC/DC models): 275 Watts nominal, 400 Watts maximum
•
Cooling Air: per ARINC 600
•
Recommended Flow rate: 88 kg/hr (185 lbs/hr)
•
Pressure drop: 5 ±3 mm (0.07 ±0.025 in.) H2O
(2) Fan Tray Requirements
WARNING: FAILURE TO INSTALL AND CONFIGURE THE FAN TRAY
ASSEMBLY AS INSTRUCTED MAY SERIOUSLY COMPROMISE
THE HSD-440 TERMINAL'S EXTREME TEMPERATURE
OPERATION.
For adequate airflow to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal subassemblies, install plugs
in the fan/tray configuration as illustrated in Figure 3-1. Fan tray assemblies may be
shipped with or without plugs. If required, order additional plugs from your fan tray
manufacturer.
Figure 3-1 Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed)
23-15-30
3-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
C. Chassis Grounding
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal tray-mounted assemblies must be electrically bonded to
the airframe. Make sure that the mating surfaces are free from contaminants such as
paints or other non-conductive elements. Where surface preparations are insufficient to
ensure a proper bond, EMS Aviation recommends using a short, tin-coated, copper
bonding strap of at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) in width. The LRU and tray assemblies should
provide a low impedance path of <0.2 ohms.
4. Electrical Installation
This section provides electrical installation details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
A. Cabling and Connector Requirements
This section provides general electrical installation information on power, ground,
shielding requirements, and cabling.
(1) Power Requirements
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can operate from the aircraft’s +28 V dc or 115 V ac,
400 Hz (nominal) power supply. If both power sources are connected, the terminal
will use the 115 V ac supply.
(2) Ground Requirements
Improper grounding can lead to ground loops and induced Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI) or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). When installing an
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow standard grounding practices for both chassis and
cabling shields. Refer to "Chassis Grounding" on page 3-4 for chassis and tray
grounding instructions.
(3) Cable Shielding and Termination
The preferred method of cable shield termination is in accordance with NEMA WC
27500:2000 and ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A—Guidance for Aircraft Electrical
Power Utilization and Transient Protection provides more detailed information in
Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and in Appendix 7.
Unless otherwise stated, all cable shields must be connected to the closest aircraft
ground at both ends of the cable and on both sides of any production break in the
cable. Where applicable, terminate shields with connectors via the backshell or via
a pigtail with a suitable termination to the closest aircraft ground.
General aviation cable-routing guidelines apply. See Table 3-1 for detailed
information.
NOTE: Typically, Ethernet and ISDN cables have multiple shields; terminate each
shield separately.
23-15-30
3-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-1 Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications
Conductor Type
(Typical)
Cable Function
Single
Point
N/A
Multiple
Point
Minimum Conductor
Coverage By Shield
N/A
N/A
Power Lines
Single conductor, stranded
Digital Control
Twisted pair, stranded
Yes
85%
Serial Data
Twisted pair, stranded
Yes
85%
Ethernet Data
Twisted pair, stranded
Yes
85%
ISDN Data
Twisted pair, stranded
Yes
85%
Discrete Lines
Single conductor, stranded
N/A
N/A
RF TX and RX
Coaxial
Yes
95%
N/A
Single Point: Cable shield terminated at one end only via a connector or suitable crimp terminal.
Multiple Point: Cable shield terminated at both ends via a connector or suitable crimp terminal,
usually at both ends of the cable and at both sides of any production break.
N/A: Not applicable.
To minimize Passive Intermodulation (PIM), the coaxial cable between the DLNA and
the antenna must be double-shielded (braid and foil wrap) with gold-plated and soldered
(not crimped) connector contacts. Do not use nickel, nickel plating, or stainless steel.
B. Installation Wiring Notes
This section includes wiring notes and connection details about strapping.
(1) Source/Destination Identification
Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the HPA as per ARINC 741
specifications. Pins marked 0 are left open-circuit and pins marked 1 are strapped
on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as SDI Common (TP5D).
For this HGA application, strap pin TP5B (1) and leave TP5A (0) open.
NOTE: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic
Attachment 1-4, Note 19. The SDI/WOW logic in this case (where 0=open
and 1=strapped to common) is the reverse of the logic applied to all other
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors, FWD ID, system configuration, and
data I/O configuration, where 0=strapped to common and 1=open.
(2) Maintenance Port Interface
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal has an RS-232 maintenance port interface that
provides access to the MPU for data loading, system monitoring, and testing
purposes.
Access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU is achieved by connecting an RS-232,
VT-100 terminal (computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232
maintenance port.
23-15-30
3-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port is available at the front of the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the
front of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is accessible via a DB25S connector for local
maintenance of the terminal. Remote access is provided for cases where local access
is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin
area.
NOTE: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot
operate simultaneously.
Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for information on how to connect
and use the maintenance port, including equipment requirements, connection and
cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.
(3) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface
Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain) that must
be delimited to ensure proper operation dictate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
performance requirements.
Table 3-2 defines the RF parameters and their expected values.
Table 3-2 RF Parameters Definitions
Parameter
Min. Value (dB)
Antenna Gain
12
Antenna to DLNA Loss
Max. Value (dB)
17
0.3
DLNA Gain
53
DLNA Noise Figure
60
1.8
DLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal (Rx) Loss
25
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to Antenna (Tx) Loss
5 (including DLNA
loss)
DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port)
–
0.8
(4) WOW Pins
The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or connected to the airframe
DC ground through a ground proximity switch. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin
is either left open circuit or connected to the Forward Address Common. The two
ground states for any pin are open and closed circuit.
Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is in-air.
The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state
of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3-3 for details.
23-15-30
3-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-3 WOW Pin Wiring
Pin Name and Location
WOW1
WOW2
PGM
TP3G
TP3K
TP3J
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
In-air
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
Not valid—Default in-air
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
Not valid—Default in-air
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
On-ground
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
On-ground
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
Not valid—Default in-air
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
Not valid—Default in-air
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
In-air
Aircraft Status
WOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground and are used for flight
data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is
not required. WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status, if the Inertial
Reference System (IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the
CMC is not providing valid data.
The function of WOW can inhibit RF transmission when the aircraft is on the ground.
This function is disabled by default and must be enabled through the ORT parameter
TRANSMIT ON GROUND—see "Configuring Transmit on Ground" on page 6-27.
NOTE: If the WOW function is disabled, do not perform normal maintenance when
the system is active to avoid RF exposure. Follow normal safety procedures
and disable the system before performing antenna maintenance.
(5) ICAO IDs
TheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal requires an ICAO ID to operate and access classic
services. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives the ICAO ID either from discrete
strapping or from an ARINC 429 source as determined by the ICAO CODE SOURCE
ORT parameter—see "Configuring the ICAO Code Source" on page 6-15.
Figure 3-2 provides an example of a strapped ICAO ID address. This number (for
example: Decimal 11256099, Hex ABC123, or Octal 52740443) must be converted
into a binary number for strapping.
NOTE: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.
23-15-30
3-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-2 ICAO ID, Hex to Binary Conversion
A pin strapped to the same potential as TP7K is considered a logical 0, whereas an
open circuit pin is considered a logical 1.
23-15-30
3-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional)
An optional remote status panel may be installed when HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals
are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a remote status
panel is recommended as it provides visual indications of the power and faults for
each terminal.
A remote reset switch for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can also be installed and
located with the remote status panel. Figure 3-3 illustrates a typical wiring diagram
for the remote reset circuit.
(a) Remote Reset Circuit Switch Requirements
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch
circuit as shown in Figure 3-3.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms
between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10
kilohms to be de-asserted (includes all cable and switch contact resistance).
Figure 3-3 Remote Reset Circuit Switch
(b) Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements
The circuit requirements for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Status LED
drivers are shown in Figure 3-4. Each LED driver circuit provides an open-drain
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) interface that has a maximum continuous
drain-to-source voltage of 35 V dc and drain-to-source current of 0.5 A dc. These
circuits are designed to sink current to ground only. Any external lamps or LEDs
connected to these driver circuits require the appropriate external voltage and
series impedance to be connected.
23-15-30
3-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-4 Remote LED Panel Circuit
(7) System Configuration Strapping
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal adjusts its configuration according to the status of
several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.
Configuration pins are assigned based on system mode configuration selection and
data I/O requirements, as shown in Table 3-4. Detailed pin assignment is shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-4 Configuration Pin Summary
Pin Number
Name
Function
TP4A to D
System Config 1 to 4
System Mode Strap Pins
MP5G to K
I/O config 1 to 4
Not assigned (set to 1)
NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained
in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19.
•
Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K).
•
Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit-no connection.
•
Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.
(8) System Mode Strap Pins Coding
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be externally strapped according to its intended
operational configuration mode. Table 3-5 illustrates the system pin strapping for
currently supported HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operational modes and
configurations.
23-15-30
3-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-5 System Pin Strapping
Pin Status
TP4A
TP4B
TP4C
TP4D
Valid - provides Aero H+
services only
Valid - provides Aero H+
and Swift services
System Mode
All other combinations are invalid and could cause an operating failure.
NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained
in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19.
•
Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K).
•
Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.
•
Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.
(9) Call Light Activation Strapping
Table 3-6 shows the configuration strapping for call light activation.
Table 3-6 Call Light Activation Configuration Strapping
Pin Number
TP4E
Name
Call Light Activation
Function
Determines whether the call light illuminates on call
activation or initialization. Activation occurs when the
GES is responding to the call request, and initialization
occurs the moment the call is placed. (1=Activation;
0=Initialization)
(10)Hookswitch Strapping
Table 3-7 shows the configuration strapping for the hookswitch method.
Table 3-7 Hookswitch Configuration Strapping
Pin Number
TP2G
Name
Hookswitch Method
Function
Determines Push To Talk (PTT) or Latched Mode
(0=Latched; 1=PTT)
(11) Priority 4 Call Strapping
Table 3-8 shows the configuration strapping for priority 4 calls.
23-15-30
3-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-8 Priority 4 Call Configuration Strapping
Pin Number
TP4F
Name
Function
Inhibit Priority 4 Calls
Determines whether priority 4 calls are inhibited to and
from the cockpit. When these calls are inhibited,
incoming calls are not allowed, and outgoing priority 4
calls are rejected. (1=Uninhibited; 0=Inhibited)
(12)Cockpit Voice Strapping
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal announces incoming calls with chimes and lights or
the Call Control (CD) discretes, as determined by the Cockpit Call Signaling Mode
ORT parameter. If set to Light/Chime, the strapping for this function is shown in
Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit Voice
TP4G
TP4H
Lights
Chime
Strapped
Strapped
Strapped
Open
Steady
Multi-stroke (chime sounds every 0.5 to 1
second)
Open
Strapped
Flashing
Single-stroke (chime sounds once)
Open
Open
Steady
Single-stroke
Spare
(13)User Interfaces
To facilitate access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal interfaces, install the following
connectors in the appropriate cabin area.
(a) ISDN Interface
Install an RJ45 connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN
interface.
(b) Ethernet Data Interface
Install one or two RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area for user access to
the Ethernet interfaces.
(c) RJ45 Connector Termination Details
Details relating to the RJ45 cable terminations required for both the ISDN and/or
10BASE-T services are shown in Figure 3-5 and Table 3-10.
23-15-30
3-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-5 RJ45 Connector Terminator Details
Table 3-10 RJ45 Wiring Details
Service
EURO ISDN
SIGNAL
PIN
ETHERNET 10BASE-T
CABLE
ECS
OTHER
PIN
CABLE
ECS
OTHER
RX+
White
White/green
White
White/orange stripe
RX-
Blue
Green
Green
Orange/white stripe or
solid orange
TX+
White
Blue
White
White/green stripe
TX-
Orange
White/blue
Brown
Green/white stripe or
solid Green
Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements.
Cables #922404 (4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by
Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from
other manufacturers may be used.
(14)System Interfaces
(a) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface
Navigational information is provided to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through
the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. Refer to "System Description" on
page 1-1 for more information. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the
ARINC 600 connector to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal as follows:
23-15-30
3-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
IRS#1 A TP4J
•
IRS#1 B TP4K
•
IRS#2 A TP5C*
•
IRS#2 B TP5E*
You can configure IRS#2 as a secondary IRS bus, or an input bus for the
AES ID.
(b) Antenna Interface
The ARINC 741 antenna subsystem BSU is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal as specified in Table 3-11.
Table 3-11 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects
Signal Source
Signal Name
HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal
Mechanical
HGA
Phased-Array or
Conformal HGA
Signal
Destination
Top/Port BSU-G
TP3A
STBD BSU-G
TP3C
Top/Port BSU-H
TP3B
STBD BSU-H
TP3D
Port BSU-W
TP2A
STBD BSU-W
TP2C
Port BSU-X
TP2B
STBD BSU-X
TP2D
HPA MUTE A
HPA MUTE B
BSU-W(G)*
BSU BITE A
BSU-X(H)
BSU BITE B
Multi-Control A
TP3E
BSU-T(A)
Multi-Control B
TP3F
BSU-U(B)
*Letters in (brackets) represent EMS Aviation AMT-50 BSU pin designations
Top/Port (T/P):
Port:
Starboard (STBD):
NOTE:
Refers to Mechanical (fin-mount) HGA Subsystem
Refers to Phased Array (Fuselage-mount) or Port side of Dual (side)
Conformal-mount, HGA subsystem
Refers to starboard side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount HGA subsystem
If a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 cannot use the side mount
antennas because the input is allocated to either the third MCDU or the
starboard BSU Bite.
23-15-30
3-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(c) CMU Interface
Data rates, voltage thresholds, and electrical interface specifications are per
ARINC Specification 429. (741 p2-7 p4.7.2). The ARINC 600 wiring
interconnections for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and each CMU are shown in
Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 CMU Strapping
Pin
Name
To
TP1A
CMU 1 Input A
CMU 1 TP1A
TP1B
CMU 1 Input B
CMU 1 TP1B
TP1C
CMU 1/2 Output A
CMU 1/2 MP2C
TP1D
CMU 1/2 Output B
CMU 1/2 MP2D
MP1K
CMU 2 Input A
CMU 2 TP1A
MP2K
CMU 2 Input B
CMU 2 TP1B
You can set the bus speed either low or high. Both the transmit and receive ports
of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ARINC 429 CMU ports operate together at
either low speed or high speed. Both CMUs therefore work at either low speed
or high speed, but not at different speeds. You can select the speed by setting
a flag in the ORT parameter CMU INPUT SPEED SELECT and CMU OUTPUT
SPEED SELECT instead of setting a program pin on the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal A600 connector (there are no pins available). If information is not
available from the ORT, the bus speed default is low.
(d) MCDU Interface
Table 3-13 shows the strapping for the MCDU.
Table 3-13 MCDU Strapping
Pin
Name
TP2C
MCDU 3 input A
TP2D
MCDU 3 input B
MP3E
MCDU 2 input A
MP3F
MCDU 2 input B
MP7G
MCDU 1 input A
MP7H
MCDU 1 input B
MP7J
MCDU 1/2/3 output A
MP7K
MCDU 1/2/3 output B
C. Connection Details
"Connection Details" on page 3-19 provides all top, middle, and bottom plug connection
details for all installations.
23-15-30
3-15
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
5. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test
This section describes the passive intermodulation (PIM) test. You must execute the PIM test
after installation, if theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operates in SwiftBroadband mode.
A. Overview
To meet Inmarsat requirements for SBB operation, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can
test for passive intermodulation effects. The PIM test verifies that the transmit signal from
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not degrade or interfere with the receive signals as
a result of PIM.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can only perform the PIM test when the aircraft is on the
ground.
When theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminallogs on to the SBB network, the network assigns the
terminal two channels for PIM testing. These channels are not used by other terminals
so that theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminalcan transmit the test frequencies without interfering
with other satellite communication equipment or the Inmarsat satellite.
NOTE: You can monitor the progress of the PIM test by turning on report 208 in the
HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalMPU. When report 208 is not running, the terminal
displays only the results of the test, not the progress.
B. PIM Requirements
In order to successfully perform the PIM test, the aircraft and the satellite communication
system must meet the following requirements:
•
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must have successfully logged on to a satellite that
is visible at the test location within the last 168 hours (8 days).
•
The aircraft must not be near any sources of PIM, such as hangars and towers.
•
The aircraft must be facing due north in the northern hemisphere, and due south in
the southern hemisphere.
C. PIM Test
To start the PIM test:
1. In theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, navigate to Menu 30.
MENU 30
FIRMWARE Vx.x GND
list PIMBIT parameters
fakeout PIMBIT parameters
 N next menu
 O
initiate manual PIMBIT
initiate/stop PIMBIT
previous menu
= select reports
2. To start the PIM test, press p.
The PIM test starts. The test takes about five minutes.
23-15-30
3-16
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
D. PIM Test Results
(1) PIM Test Overall Status
At the end of the PIM test, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the test results.
Figure 3-6 shows an example of the test results.
23-15-30
3-17
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
PIMBIT REPORT: OVERALL STATUS PASS
TEST STARTED: Jan 16 08:15:58 2001
ICAO ADDRESS: NOT OBTAINED
TEST ENDED:
Jan 16 08:20:36 2001
ANTENNA SERIAL NUMBER: 456
TESTED USING MANUALLY ENTERED FREQUENCIES
TRANSMIT CHANNEL 1 = $1CE8 (1630.000 MHz)
TRANSMIT CHANNEL 2 = $4268 (1654.000 MHz)
RECEIVE CHANNEL
= $4B00 (1558.000 MHz)
INTERMOD ORDER
= 7.00
LAST INFORMATION RECEIVED (APPROX) 8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001
PARAMETERS UNCHANGED SINCE
8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001
DIRECTION 1:
STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=12.50
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.14 dB STD DEV 0.03 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.19 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.71 dBm
SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.05 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.85 dBm
DIRECTION 2: STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=18.00
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.07 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.66 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.92 dBm
SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.23 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.05 dBm
DIRECTION 3: STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=12.50
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.14 dB STD DEV 0.02 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.01 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.96 dBm
SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.21 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.94 dBm
DIRECTION 4: STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=18.00
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.13 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -16.04 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.84 dBm
DIRECTION 5: STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=12.50
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.12 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.00 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.73 dBm
DIRECTION 6: STATUS PASS
GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=18.00
SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.10 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB
?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m
SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.14 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -33.03 dBm
SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.87 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.02 dBm
PIMBIT COMPLETE
Figure 3-6 Example PIM Test Results
23-15-30
3-18
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The first line of the PIMBIT report displays the overall PIM status. If the overall status
is PASS, the HSD-440 can continue to use SBB services.
If the overall status is FAIL:
•
Check the cable connections of the antenna and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
•
Check the direction in which the test failed and verify that the antenna is not
blocked in that direction—see "Directional PIM Test Results" on page 3-19.
(2) Directional PIM Test Results
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performs the PIM test with the antenna pointing in
different directions and displays the results of the test in each direction. If the overall
status of the PIM test is FAIL, you can check the specific directions in which the test
failed.
For each direction, the PIM test results provide:
•
Overall Status—pass or fail.
•
The direction coordinates.
•
The signal degradation—the maximum value to pass the test is 3 dB.
•
Possible interference—interference caused by environmental factors, not the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmit frequencies. Interference indicates that the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal received a signal in the receive band even when it
wasn’t transmitting, therefore an external signal may be interfering with
communication in that direction.
•
Signal and noise levels before and after the test—the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
uses this information to check for possible interference.
6. Installation and Engineering Diagrams
This section contains the Outline and Installation diagrams, and Interconnection and Contact
Assignment drawings for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
All foldout pages are odd-numbered and not-backed for print production purposes.
A. Outline and Installation Diagrams
Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal and provides installation data for the terminal.
B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment Drawings
Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the Interconnection details for the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals.
7. Connection Details
Table 3-14, Table 3-15, and Table 3-16 show the top, middle, and bottom plug connection
details for HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals.
23-15-30
3-19
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details
I/O
From
Top
Plug
Signal Name
To
Description
1A
CMU 1 Input A
CMU 1 TP1A
CMU 1 RX A
1B
CMU 1 Input B
CMU 1 TP1B
CMU 1 RX B
1C
CMU 1/2 Output A
CMU 1/2 MP2C
CMU 1/2 TX A
1D
CMU 1/2 Output B
CMU 1/2 MP2D
CMU 1/2 TX B
1E
ARINC 615 Input A
1F
ARINC 615 Input B
1G
ARINC 615 Output A
1H
ARINC 615 Output B
1J
ARINC 615 Link A
1K
ARINC 615 Link B
(GND)
2A
BSU Top/Port BITE A
Mech. Steered Antenna
(MA): BSU, Pin G or W or
Other Antenna (OA): BSU,
PORT-W and starboard-P
ARINC Tx-HI BITE from
BSU
2B
BSU Top/Port BITE B
MA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA:
BSU, PORT-X and STBD-R
ARINC Tx-LO BITE
from BSU
2C
BSU Starboard (STBD)
BITE A or MCDU 3 Input
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, PORT-P and
STBD-W
ARINC Tx-HI BITE from
BSU
2D
BSU STBD BITE B
or MCDU 3 Input B
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, PORT-R and
STBD-X
ARINC Tx-LO BITE
from BSU
2E
Spare 1 ARINC 429
Output A
2F
Spare 1 ARINC 429
Output B
2G
Hookswitch method
2H
Spare 2 ARINC 429
Input A
2J
Spare 2 ARINC 429
Input B
2K
Remote Reset
Normally open momentary
switch-open side.
(Closed side to MP1F)
Remote System Reset
ARINC 615 Data Loader
23-15-30
3-20
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)
I/O
From
Top
Plug
Signal Name
To
Description
3A
Top/Port HPA MUTE A
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, PORT-G
HPA Mute-A, Port BSU
3B
Top/Port HPA MUTE B
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, PORT-H
HPA Mute-B, Port BSU
3C
STBD HPA MUTE A
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, STBD G
HPA Mute-A, STBD
BSU
3D
STBD HPA MUTE B
MA: Not required
OA: BSU, STBD-H
HPA Mute-B, STBD
BSU
Multi-Control-HI to
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal and antenna
subsystem
Multi-Control-LO to
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal and antenna
subsystem
3E
Multi-Control A
MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or OA:
BSU, PORT-T and STBD-T
3F
Multi-Control B
MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or OA:
BSU, PORT-U and STBD-U
3H
Tx Disable
3G
WOW 1
TP3G
3K
WOW 2
TP3K
3J
WOW Program Select
TP3J
Weight On Wheel, as
defined in Note 40 of
ARINC 741, Part 1.
Refer to "WOW Pins" on
page 3-6
4A and 4C=0 (TP7K
common), 4B,
4D=1(open) for standalone
mode
4A–4D
System Config 1 to 4
and
Wire 4A 4C, 4D =0 (TP7K
common), 4B =1 (open) for
Aero only operation
Open for Call light On at
Call Connection
4E
Call light activation
Closed for Call Light on
at Call Initiation
Open Allow Priority 4
calls to and from
Cockpit
4F
Priority 4 Calls
Closed Inhibit Priority 4
calls to and from
Cockpit
23-15-30
3-21
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)
I/O
From
Top
Plug
Signal Name
To
Description
G=0(strapped),
4H=1(open) Steady
lamp, multi-stroke
chime
4G
4G=1(open),
4H=0(strapped)
Flashing lamp, single
stroke chime
Chime/light option MS
4G=1(open),
4H=1(open) Steady
lamp, single-stroke
chime
4H
Chime/light option LS
4J
IRS 1A
Aircraft main IRS
IRS 429 data, Rx HI
4K
IRS 1B
Aircraft main IRS
IRS 429 data, Rx LO
5A
SDI 1
Not connected
HPA Select Code for
HGA
5B
SDI 2
SDI common (TP5D)
HPA Select Code for
HGA
5C
Spare 1 ARINC 429
Input A
5D
SDI Common
5C IRS #2 Input A
5E IRS #2 Input B
SDI Common for HPA
select codes
5E
Spare 1 ARINC 429
Input B
5F–7J
ICAO Address,
BITS 24 to 1
7K
ICAO Address,
Common
1 = no connection
0 = common (TP7K)
23-15-30
Common GND
connection for system
and I/O configuration
and ICAO ID
3-22
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details
I/O
From
Middle
Plug
1A
Discrete output 1
Remote status panel
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal-Power On
(Optional)
1B
Discrete output 2
Remote status panel
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal-Fault
(Optional)
1C
Spare
1D
Switch HI current from
chime
1E
1D 1E outputs to Audio
control panel
1F
Discrete Common
Remote status panel
Discrete Common
1G
Maint Port Tx
Maint Port serial data,
DB9S-2
1H
Maint Port Rx
Maint Port serial data,
DB9S-3
I/O
1J
Maint Port Signal
Ground
Maint Port serial data,
DB9S-5
1K
CMU 2 Input A
CMU 2 TP1A
2A
Data I/O Tx
No connection
2B
Data I/O Rx
No connection
2C
SDU data
Future
2D
SDU data
Future
2E
SCM data
Future
2F
SCM data
Future
2G
SCM power +12 V
Future
2H
SCM power return 0 V
Future
2J
Data I/O Ground
No connection
2K
CMU 2 Input B
CMU 2 TP1B
3A
Call light 1
Audio Control Panel
3B
Mic on 1
Audio Management System
3C
Chime light inhibit
Audio Control Panel
Signal Name
To
23-15-30
Description
Maintenance computer
(laptop/PC), for Remote
access
CMU 2 RX A
CMU 2 RX B
3-23
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)
I/O
From
Middle
Plug
Signal Name
To
Description
3D
Place/end 1
Audio Management System
3E
MCDU 2 input A
MCDU 2 J4-27
MCDU 2 RX A
3F
MCDU 2 input B
MCDU 2 J4-28
MCDU 2 RX B
3G
Call light 2
Audio Control Panel
3H
Mic on 2
Audio Management System
3J
Go-ahead / Chime
reset
Audio Control Panel
3K
Place/End 2
Audio Management System
I/O
4A
POTS 1 TIP
2-wire Analog Phone TIP
(RJ-11, Pin 3)
I/O
4B
POTS 1 RING
2-wire Analog Phone RING
(RJ-11, Pin 2)
I/O
4C
POTS 2 TIP
2-wire Analog Phone TIP
(RJ-11, Pin 3)
I/O
4D
POTS 2 RING
2-wire Analog Phone RING
(RJ-11, Pin 2)
4E
Input Audio 1 HI
cockpit headset 1
4F
Input Audio 1 LO
cockpit headset 1
POTS Line 1
POTS Line 2
cockpit headset 1
I/O
4G–4K
Reserved
5A
CEPT-E1 Rx+
CTU Satcom1 E1 TX+
CTU E1 Bus
5B
CEPT-E1 Rx-
CTU Satcom1 E1 TX-
CTU E1 Bus
5C
CEPT-E1 Tx+
CTU Satcom1 E1 RX+
CTU E1 Bus
5D
CEPT-E1 Tx-
CTU Satcom1 E1 RX-
CTU E1 Bus
5E
Output Audio 1 HI
Cockpit Headset 2
Microphone HI
5F
I/O
5G–5K
Output Audio 1 LO
Cockpit Headset 2
Microphone LO
Cockpit Headset 1
Speaker
Reserved
23-15-30
3-24
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)
I/O
From
Middle
Plug
Signal Name
To
6A
ISDN 1 Rx+
ISDN, RJ45-3
6B
ISDN 1 Rx-
ISDN, RJ45-6
6C
ISDN 1 Tx+
ISDN, RJ45-4
6D
ISDN 1 Tx-
ISDN, RJ45-5
6E
Input Audio 2 HI
6F
Input Audio 2 LO
Description
User data, ISDN-1
Refer to "User
Interfaces" on page
3-12
Cockpit Headset 2
Microphone HI
6G
10BASE-T Tx+
Cockpit Headset 2
Microphone LO
6H
10BASE-T Tx-
Ethernet 10BASE-T
RJ45, Pin 2
6J
10BASE-T Rx+
Ethernet 10BASE-T
RJ45, Pin 3
6K
10BASE-T Rx-
Ethernet 10BASE-T
RJ45, Pin 6
7A
10BASE-T Tx+
Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1
7B
10BASE-T Tx-
Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2
7C
10BASE-T Rx+
Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3
7D
10BASE-T Rx-
Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6
7E
Output Audio 2 HI
Cockpit Headset 2 Speaker
HI
7F
Output Audio 2 LO
7G
MCDU 1 Input A
7H
MCDU 1 Input B
7J
MCDU 1/2 Output A
7K
MCDU 1/2 Output B
C1
RF Tx Output
Cockpit Voice
Microphone 2
Port 1
User data
Ethernet 10BASE-T
Cockpit Headset 2 Speaker
LO
Antenna subsystem-DLNA
or HPR-J
23-15-30
Coaxial cable, RF
Transmit
3-25
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 3-16 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details
I/O
From
Bottom
Plug
Signal Name
To
Description
BP2
+28 V dc HOT
Aircraft power source, HOT
BP3
+28 V dc return
GND
Aircraft power source, return
BP8
Chassis GND
Aircraft ground
I/O
BP4
Reserved
I/O
BP5
Spare
I/O
BP6
Reserved
BP1
115 V ac HOT
Aircraft power source, HOT
BP7
115 V ac COLD
Aircraft power source, COLD
I/O
+28 V dc supply
BP9–BP11
BP12
BP13
Aircraft Chassis
Ground
115 V ac 400 Hz
supply
Spare
RF Rx Input
Antenna subsystem-DLNA
Coaxial cable, RF
Receive
Reserved
23-15-30
3-26
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-7 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram
(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)
23-15-30
3-27
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
3-28
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-8 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram
(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)
23-15-30
3-29
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
3-30
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-9 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)
23-15-30
3-31
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
3-32
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 3-10 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)
23-15-30
3-33
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
3-34
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION
This chapter provides information required to determine the operational readiness of HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminals and aid service personnel in diagnosing system faults. The operational and diagnostic
tests described in this section require using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s built-in diagnostic tool,
the MPU.
This chapter includes:
•
Operational and Diagnostic Testing
•
Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation
•
Adjustment/Alignment Procedures
•
Modification History
NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU report and menu screens displayed
may differ from those shown as examples in this manual. The menu screens in this section
correspond to the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal in maintenance user mode.
1. Operational and Diagnostic Testing
This section includes the following sections:
•
General
•
Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements
•
Terminal Maintenance Port Utility
•
Inmarsat Cause Codes
•
Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures
A. General
Usually, terminals require testing for one of the following reasons:
•
To verify the operational readiness of the terminal during and after installation on an
aircraft
•
To verify that a fault exists and produce system reports for troubleshooting purposes
•
To verify the operational readiness of repaired LRUs during re-installation on an
aircraft
This section includes test and fault isolation procedures for the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals. All test and load procedures require the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU,
which is accessed by connecting to the maintenance port of the terminal.
B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements
Table 4-1 lists the equipment required to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and
perform operational and diagnostic testing and software loading on the HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal.
23-15-30
4-35
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-1 List of Required Test Equipment
Item
Equipment
Specification
Quantity
Computer
Standard
VT-100 386 CPU, 20 MHz or higher
VT-100 terminal
emulation program
HyperTerminal©,
ProComm Plus©, or
equivalent
Serial communication program using an 1
RS-232 port
Cable, maintenance
port interface cable
Special
Remote access maximum cable length 1
25 ft. (From ARINC 600 connector to
DB9 breakout connector)
See "Connection
Requirements" on
page 4-37
Test cable maximum length 25 ft.
(From HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to
management computer)
Front Panel access maximum cable
length 50 ft.
Multimeter
Standard
–
General purpose
toolset
Standard
–
Table 4-2 lists the optional equipment or information that is not required, but may increase
test efficiency or allow for optional diagnostic procedures. Equivalent substitutions may
be used.
Table 4-2 List of Optional Test Equipment
Item
Equipment
Specification
Quantity
Service Provider Information Package Special
Inmarsat service provider
Internet access
Standard
Inmarsat Swift 64 high-speed
data
Time Domain Refectometer
Standard
–
C. Terminal Maintenance Port Utility
This section describes the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and provides the connection
and cabling details required to access and use the program.
(1) General Overview
The MPU, built into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal's operational software, provides
a system interface for fault isolation and diagnostic procedures.
To use the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, connect an RS-232, VT-100 terminal
(computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 maintenance port
interface of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
The maintenance port on the front panel of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provides a
direct connection to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU using a DB25 connector.
Optionally, remote cabin access is possible using a DB9 connector via the ARINC
600 connector.
23-15-30
4-36
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(2) Connection Requirements
This section describes specific cabling requirements needed to connect to and use
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
(a) Cabling Notes
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two options to connect to the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port and MPU: direct connection and remote
connection.
Table 4-3, Table 4-4, Figure 4-1, and Figure 4-2 provide cabling details for the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal for both direct and remote connection types. Select
one of these connection options to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
NOTE: The direct and remote connection points to the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.
Table 4-3 Remote Connection Cabling
Remote Access
Pin Definition
Maint Port SGND
ARINC Connector
(Rear)
(MP1J)
Computer
(DB9P)
Remote (DB9)
Cable
Maint Port Rx
(MP1H)
Maint Port Tx
(MP1G)
(See Figure 4-1)
Table 4-4 Direct Connection Cabling
Direct Connection
Pin Definition
Maint Port SGND
Front Panel
10
Maintenance Cable
Connector (DB25P)
10
Maint Port Rx
12
12
Maint Port Tx
11
11
Computer
(DB9P)
Cable
(See Figure 4-2)
(b) Maintenance Port Cable Assembly
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance cable connections may vary in length,
type of connection used, and connector pin call outs, depending on the access
point used.
The cable assembly for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assumes that the
computer's COM port interface is a 9-Pin, D-Sub connector (DB9). Cable
assembly details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are presented in Figure 4-1 and
Figure 4-2.
NOTE: The maximum cable length, shown in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2,
assumes that the length is measured from the ARINC 600 connector to
the DB9 breakout connector.
23-15-30
4-37
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure 4-1 Remote Connection, Maintenance Cable
Figure 4-2 Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable
(c) Interface Requirements
A standard VT-100 compatible terminal running an emulator program (such as
HyperTerminal, ProComm Plus, or similar) provides the user interface to the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. The RS-232 terminal connection settings for
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance ports are listed in Table 4-5.
23-15-30
4-38
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-5 Terminal Connection Settings
Parameter
Setting
Character Format
ASCII
Baud Rate
19200 bps
No. of bits
Parity
None
Stop bits
Flow Control
None
(3) Accessing the MPU
There are various levels of access to the MPU. Each level is protected by a different
password.
This document describes End User and Field Representative access levels. These
levels provide access and tools for operational testing and verification, software
updates, and the basic system monitoring and troubleshooting procedures provided
in this manual.
(a) Level 1 Access
This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product.
It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance
of product support personnel.
The password for access to this level is menu.
(b) Level 2 Access
This level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (OEM) installers and
product support personnel. This access level supports read and limited write
capabilities. Users can disable, mask, or clear faults, change satellite or
LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and
maintain and upgrade the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
The password for this level is maint.
(4) Using the Terminal MPU
This section describes the basic procedures for using and navigating the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
(a) Entering Passwords
You can enter the password any time after the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots.
•
To access Level 1 functions, type menu.
•
To access Level 2 functions, type maint.
NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen when you type it.
23-15-30
4-39
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(b) Navigating the Terminal MPU
•
To scroll through the available menus, press CTRL+N.
•
To go to the previous menu, press CTRL+O.
•
To refresh the menu screen or exit from a Reports Menu, press ESC.
(c) Selecting Menu Items
To enable test or data entry functions, press the letter associated with the menu
items.
(d) Selecting Reports
The reports available through the MPU enable users to view information about
the configuration and status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. This information is
used to troubleshoot the communication system on the aircraft.
"Report Descriptions" on page 4-53 provides more information about reports.
To access reports:
1. In the MPU, press EQUAL SIGN.
A list of reports appears. Active reports show as toggled on. Inactive reports
show as toggled off.
2. To activate a report, type the report number, and then press ENTER.
NOTE: Multiple reports can be activated at the same time; type and enter
each report number separately.
3. To turn off individual, active reports, type the report number you want to toggle
off, and then press ENTER.
4. To turn off all active reports, press EQUAL SIGN, and then press X.
(5) Menu Item Descriptions
This section provides a brief description of the Level 2, MPU menu items used for test
and fault isolation procedures.
Although this section only provides illustrations and descriptions for Level 2 access,
all Level 1 access menu items are covered. (All Level 1 menus are included in Level
2 Menus.)
In active HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, menu screens display the firmware version.
NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the system configuration,
the menu and reports available to users may differ slightly from the
illustrations shown and described in this document.
(a) Menu 1
Figure shows an example Menu 1 screen display. Table 4-6 describes the items
available in Menu 1.
23-15-30
4-40
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MENU 1
FIRMWARE Vx.x GND
override forward id/ICAO address L
test LEDs
explain error status
list event log (hex)
print equipment stats
clear equipment stats
permit TFTP software loads
 N next menu
 O previous menu
= select reports
Menu 1 Screen Display
Table 4-6 Menu 1 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Description
X: override forward
id/ICAO address
Used in testing and fault isolation.
Enter a test or alternate FWD ID or ICAO ID to use during fault isolation
procedures. Resetting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or cycling the power
cancels this function.
Y: explain error status Reports error status when failure LED is illuminated.
F: print equipment
stats
Prints a list of the current equipment statistics.
N: permit TFTP
software loads
Upgrade or load HSD software using the EMS serial data loader connected
to the HSD terminal maintenance port and using TFTP over the front panel
Ethernet port.
Note: When this option is enabled, software loads start within the next 10
minutes. To enable this option, the aircraft air/ground status must be
on-ground.
L: test LEDs
Toggles the Power On (LED 1) and Fault (LED 2) LEDs on (A) and off (D)
or returns them to software control (X).
U: list event log
Lists the current event log.
M: clear equipment
stats
Resets the equipment statistics. (See Item F.)
(b) Menu 2
Figure 4-3 shows an example MPU Menu 2 screen display. Table 4-7 describes
the items available in Menu 2.
23-15-30
4-41
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MENU 2
FIRMWARE Vx.x GND
set veh-relative azimuth
desired az veh-rel velocity
enter time of day
re-enter logon password
reset 1252-A-3800-01
manual antenna steering
 N next menu
 O
set veh-relative elevation
resume automatic steering
annotate log file
get firmware versions
set satellite longitude
previous menu
select reports
Figure 4-3 Menu 2 Screen Display
Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Description
NOTE: Menu 2 selections A and E are used to manually input navigational data to point the antenna
to a preferred satellite location and/or peak for maximum signal reception. These
commands are typically used where no IRS data is available.
A: set veh-relative
azimuth
Antenna azimuth pointing offset with reference to the front centerline of
the aircraft.
Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 180, where a positive entry is
clockwise (cw) and a negative entry is counterclockwise (ccw).
K: desired az veh-rel
velocity
Activates continuous antenna azimuth sweep at a set elevation, as
entered with menu item E.
Azimuth sweep velocity entered as deg/sec value.
NOTE: When combined with a signal-monitoring reports selection,
sweep the antenna for maximum signal strength to determine
optimum location coordinates.
T: enter time of day
Permits the entry of date and time for initial one-time setting of the Real
Time Clock.
L: re-enter logon
password
Permits a user to enter a new access level password: menu or maint.
Z: reset terminal
Enables a complete, soft reset of the LRU; once reset, the menu access
password must be re-entered.
G: manual antenna
steering
Set manual antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation.
E: set veh-relative
elevation
Four options:
•
I increases elevation 0.5 deg
•
M decreases elevation 0.5 deg
•
L increases azimuth 0.5 deg
•
J decreases azimuth 0.5 deg
Antenna elevation pointing offset with respect to the aircraft horizontal
rest position; i.e., assumed to have no pitch or roll offset.
Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 90.
23-15-30
4-42
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions (Continued)
Menu Item
Description
R: resume automatic
steering
Re-activates programmed automatic antenna-steering in both azimuth
and elevation.
N: annotate log file
Allows for input of text into a log file.
This feature can be used to document information such as test conditions,
system or aircraft identification, or any pertinent information for later
review.
V: get firmware versions Displays the system Kernel and Application software versions, and the
channel card(s) and HPA firmware revisions.
S: set satellite longitude Sets the satellite longitude.
(c) Menu 3
Table 4-7Figure 4-4 shows the menu 3 screen display. Table 4-8 describes the
items available in Menu 3.
MENU 3
FIRMWARE Vx.x
list EEPROM
clear event log
list call log
list ORT
set all LES id's
set CP ORT parameter
write defaults to CP ORT
output binary ORT
list channel card event log
 N next menu
 O
list event log
misc. EEPROM parameter
clear call log
ocean region parameter
list SCM/CP ORT
copy CP ORT to SCM
clear SCM ORT
bulletin board satellite data
previous menu
select reports
Figure 4-4 Menu 3 Screen Display
Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
L: list EEPROM
Description
Displays a list of all system EEPROM parameters and their
corresponding values (this function is READ only).
Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, item M selection.
C: clear event log
Clears all events stored in non-volatile RAM.
F: list call log
Displays call log files for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. When selected,
three options are available:
•
To display complete list of all log files, press F.
•
To list extended EIRP trace data, press X.
•
To list all remaining entries, press PERIOD.
23-15-30
4-43
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions (Continued)
Menu Item
Description
O: list ORT
Displays all EEPROM parameters, including all cable losses and
LES/GES configurations.
I: set all LES id's
Displays all ORT parameters to the same LES/GES access code and
service provider (including primary and secondary service providers).
Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, set CP ORT parameter.
K: set CP ORT parameter
Use the ORT parameters to configure parameters for the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal.
T: write defaults to CP ORT Each SDU stores a copy of the User, Secure, and Manufacturer
Specific ORT parameter defaults in its software load.
V: bulletin board satellite
data
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal stores the updated satellite longitude
from the bulletin board.
S: list event log
Lists all events and system fault codes stored in non-volatile RAM.
When selected, several options are available:
•
0 displays the most recent saved entry.
•
S displays next most recent entry saved.
•
PERIOD displays all remaining logged entries.
•
1 displays special events (does not include ORR entries).
M: misc. EEPROM
parameter
Enables entry or entry changes to some of the EEPROM parameters
listed in function L.
G: clear call log
Clears call log files for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
P: ocean region parameter Configures LES access codes (primary and secondary service
providers) for individual ORs.
H: list SCM/CP ORT
Lists the values contained in both SCM and the CP ORT.
R: copy CP ORT to SCM
Copies values stored in the CP ORT to the SCM. This may take
several minutes. To indicate progress, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
displays the number of bytes remaining to transfer.
U: clear SCM ORT
Clear the ORT parameter from the SCM.
B: list channel card event log Lists the event log for individual channel cards.
For more information about ORT parameters, see "Configuring the Owners
Requirements Table (ORT)" on page 6-1.
Figure 4-5 shows an example Menu 3, Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM
parametersscreen display for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Table 4-9 describes the items available in Menu 3, Item M.
23-15-30
4-44
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS
2 FORWARD ID
3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS
11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED
14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO
15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL
16 TERMINAL CATEGORY
20 CARD 1 IP ADDRESS
21
22
29
30
31
63
64
65
CARD 2 IP ADDRESS
TRANSMIT IF WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS
DEFAULT LATTITUDE
DEFAULT LONGITUDE
OBEY OXCO STATUS
CARD 1 SUBNET MASK
CARD 2 SUBNET MASK
AIR/GROUND BEHAVIOUR
WHICH PARAMETER #  N for next page ?
73
74
83
84
85
86
87
89
CP AUTO ATTACH
CC SBB CIPER PARAMETER
IP HEADER COMPRESSION
SW64 POSITION REPORTING
APAC TEST BEARER LONGITUDE
EMEA TEST BEARER LONGITUDE
AMERICAS TEST BEARER LONGITUDE
BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION TIMEOUT
90
91
95
97
100
101
102
103
BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION THRESHOLD
BGAN/SWIFT64 AUTO HANDOVER
OVER-POWER MARGIN
CHANNEL CARD CONFIGURATION
MIN SAT LOOK ANGLE
PREEMPTABLE CALLS
BGAN/SWIFT64 HYSTERESIS TIMEOUT
ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROLL)
WHICH PARAMETER #  N for next page ?
104
105
106
108
109
110
113
ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (PITCH)
ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROTATION)
RT-CHANNEL RESERVED POWER
USWR ERROR THRESHOLD
IRS1 TYPE
IRS2 TYPE
MAXIMUM IGA POWER
114
115
116
117
118
119
MAX ORDER FOR INTERMOD CHECK
ENABLE PAP
PAP USER NAME
PAP PASSWORD
VOICE PROCESSOR IP ADDRESS
LNA TO SDU RX THRESHOLD
Figure 4-5 Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters
Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
HPA-to-antenna total
loss
Defines transmit coaxial cable loss from the HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal at MPC1 to the antenna, including the DLNA
loss—maximum is 2.5 dB (includes DLNA loss of 0.8 dB).
Forward ID
The Forward ID is not strapped, therefore you must enter
it using this parameter.
GPS protection
algorithms
Disables the GPS algorithms the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS
navigational system on the aircraft.
10
Number of channel
cards
Selects the number of channel cards for which the system
is configured. Default is 2.
11
Front panel LEDs
enabled
Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs,
beyond the two currently activated—default is 2.
23-15-30
4-45
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
14
Maintenance port
inverse video
Enables a selected report to be highlighted in Inverse Video
when it is activated—default is 1 (activated).
15
Maintenance port
degrees symbol
Offers a choice of displaying the letter D or the degree
symbol ° when viewing the lat/long information displayed
in the Reports output:
•
Select 0 to use the letter D; e.g., 180.0 D.
•
Select 1 to use a degree symbol °; e.g., 180.0°.
16
Terminal category
Configure the LRU type. Default is 2 (HW Strapping) —
hardware is read on power-up.
20
Card 1 IP address
IP address of channel card 1.
21
Card 2 IP address
IP address of channel card 2.
22
Transmit if
Weight-on-Wheels
Allows the system to transmit when it is on the ground.
29
Default latitude
Allows user to enter a default latitude value.
Reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised
default values.
30
Default longitude
Allows user to enter a default longitude value.
Reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised
default values.
31
Obey OXCO status
Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up
(unless overridden).
Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing
procedures.
60
Ch card gateway
address
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
61
IMEI number
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
62
SDU-to-PA gain
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
63
Card 1 subnet address
Subnet address of channel card 1.
64
Card 2 subnet address
Subnet address of channel card 2.
65
Air/ground behavior
Determines the function of WOW strapping.
66
#2 IMEI number
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
67
#3 IMEI number
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
68
#4 IMEI number
Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.
73
CP auto attach
To ensure that the terminal registers on the
SwiftBroadband Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched
core network, set this option to CS PS. Network
Registration is essential to access network resources to
make calls.
74
CC SBB cipher
parameter
Ciphers the messages between the terminal and the core
network.
23-15-30
4-46
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
Description
83
IP Header Compression Turns on IP header compression. Valid values: C (channel
card default = Off), 0 (Off), and 4 through 9 (On)
95
Over Power Margin
Do not change.2
97
Channel Card
Configuration
Configures channel cards for Swift64, SBB, or classic
service.2
101
Preemptable Calls
Configures which calls can be preempted when performing
a satellite handover.
102
BGAN/SWIFT64
Hysteresis Timeout
Configures the time it will take to perform a satellite
handover once a new satellite is visible.2
Default is 120.0 SEC.
103
Antenna Mounting Angle Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Roll).2
(Roll)
104
Antenna Mounting Angle Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Pitch).2
(Pitch)
105
Antenna Mounting Angle Configures the physical antenna mounting angle
(Rotation).2
(Rotation)
106
RT Channel Reserved
Power
108
VSWR Error Threshold Do not change.2
109
IRS1 Type
Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS
receiver 1.2
110
IRS2 Type
Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS
receiver 2.2
113
Maximum IGA Power
Do not change.2
115
Enable PAP
Enables PAP authentication. For configuration instructions,
refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide,
MN-1252-13005.2
116
PAP User Name
Configures PAP authentication username. Refer to the
HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.2
117
PAP Password
Configures PAP authentication password. Refer to the HSD
Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.2
118
Voice Processor IP
Address
Do not change.2
119
LNA to SDU RX
Threshold
Do not change.2
Do not change.2
(d) Menu 4
Figure 4-6 shows an example MPU Menu 4 screen display for an HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal. Table 4-10 describes the items available in Menu 4.
23-15-30
4-47
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MENU 4
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
channel card forward ID's
change spot beam
report MUX stats
 N next menu
 O
set Ocean Region
toggle ISDN connection
previous menu
select reports
Figure 4-6 Menu 4 Screen Display
Table 4-10 Menu 4 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Item Description
Q: channel card
forward IDs
Enables viewing of ISDN channels 1 and 2 FWD IDs in Swift64 mode, IMSI
in SBB mode, and ICAO for the classic channel card.
S: change spot
beam
Enables manual selection of specific spot beams independently assigned for
each ISDN channel.
M: report MUX stats Not applicable: Used for engineering debugging purposes only.
O: set Ocean
Region
Allows for manual selection of satellite ORs:
AORW:
AORE:
POR:
IOR:
MTSAT:
APAC:
EMEA:
AMERICAS: 7
To revert to programmed selection, type -1, and then press ENTER for AUTO
selection.
(e) Menu 10
Menu 10 items are used to manually enter INS or IRS parameters to simulate
the data required for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation when INS or IRS data
is unavailable. Figure 4-7 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU
Menu 10 screen.
23-15-30
4-48
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MENU 10
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
activate IRS simul words
IRS bus #1
simul IRS long
simul IRS true track
simul IRS roll
simul IRS altitude
sb ACU status
deactivate antenna status words
 N
next menu
 O
deactivate IRS simul words
simul IRS lat
simul IRS heading
simul IRS pitch
simul IRS speed
port ACU status
activate antenna status words
toggle active antenna
previous menu
select reports
Figure 4-7 Menu 10 Screen Display
Table 4-11 describes the items available in Menu 10.
Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
L: simul INS lat
Description
Simulates a latitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.
H: simul INS heading Simulates aircraft heading by overriding the data received from the aircraft
INS.
P: simul INS pitch
Simulates aircraft pitch by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.
S: simul INS speed
Simulates aircraft speed by overriding the data received from the aircraft
INS.
A: activate INS simul Activates all input simulate parameters, overriding the INS data received
words
from the aircraft.
Lat and Long values from the EEPROM values set in Menu 3.
B: simul sb ACU
status
Enter the starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.
N: deactivate
antenna status
words
De-activates all set antenna status words.
X: deactivate INS
simul words
De-activates all simulated parameters reverting the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal back to using the INS data received from the aircraft.
G: simul INS/IRS
long
Simulates aircraft longitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft
INS.
T: simul INS/IRS true Simulates true track by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.
track
R: simul INS roll
Simulates aircraft roll by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.
Q: simul INS altitude Simulates aircraft altitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft
INS.
C: simul port ACU
status
Enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.
23-15-30
4-49
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions (Continued)
Menu Item
Description
M: activate antenna Activates all set antenna status words.
status words
D: toggle active
antenna
Changes the current simulated active antenna. Choose starboard, port, or
automatic. Note that this change will only take effect if antenna status words
are activated using menu item M.
F: IRS bus #1
Do not change
(f) Menu 13
Menu 13 items are used to query and debug the data I/O card.
Figure 4-8 shows an example Menu 13 screen display. Table 4-12 describes the
items available in Menu 13.
MENU 13
query DATA IO
query DATA IO
DATA IO fault
print DATA IO
 N next menu
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
elapsed time
services
logging level
call database
 O
query DATA IO version
DATA IO test
DATA IO console mode
disable output to DATA I/O
previous menu
= select reports
Figure 4-8 Menu 13 Screen Display
Table 4-12 Menu 13 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
T: query DATA IO elapsed
time
Description
Displays the time (in seconds) since the last data I/O reset.
S: query DATA IO services Displays active interfaces.
F: DATA IO fault logging
level
Sets the level of minimum severity of events that are reported to the
data I/O card.
G: print DATA IO call
database
Displays the calls made and recorded in the data I/O database.
V: query DATA IO version
Displays the firmware version of the data I/O card.
D: DATA IO test
Tests individual interfaces of the data I/O.
X: DATA IO console mode
Opens a virtual TTY session to the data I/O maintenance port on the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Y: disable output to DATA
I/O
Disables output to data I/O from control processor.
23-15-30
4-50
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(g) Menu 14
Menu 14 items are used only by professional installers for debugging and
clarifying call routing issues.
Figure 4-9 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 14 screen
display. Table 4-13 describes some of the items available in Menu 14.
MENU 14
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
num entries in call table
list call table
get call table
list eeprom call mapping edits
modify eeprom call mapping edits
 N next menu
 O previous menu
= select reports
Figure 4-9 Menu 14 Screen Display
Table 4-13 Menu 14 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Item Description
G: modify eeprom call Do not change.
mapping edits
E: list eeprom call
mapping edits
Do not change.
(h) Menu 15
Figure 4-10 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 15 screen
display.
Table 4-14 describes the items available in Menu 15.
MENU 15
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
request channel card versions
channel card serial number
channel card RSSI mode
A_TI query
request burst counter
 N next menu
 O previous menu
= select reports
Figure 4-10 Menu 15 Screen Display
23-15-30
4-51
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-14 Menu 15 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Item Description
V: request channel
card versions
Displays software versions for a selected channel card.
B: channel card RSSI Places the channel card in Received Signal Strength Indicator mode.
mode
As requested, enter the channel number, the OR, the channel type, and
the RSSI period in milliseconds.
W: request burst
counter
Displays the burst counter information.
D: channel card serial Displays the serial number of the selected channel card.
number
G: A_TI query
Manually sends an A_TI query to the requested channel card to check on
the alive/dead status of the channel card processors.
As requested, enter a channel card number and service type to query.
(i) Menu 21
Figure 4-11 shows an example Menu 21 screen display.
Table 4-15 describes some of the items available in Menu 21.
MENU 21
1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x
get channel card ethernet parms
request SBB configuration
logoff SBB spotbeam
query channel card flashprom
inquire for spot beam map
 N next menu
 O previous
get channel card IMEI number
list spotbeam table
GPS-assisted IRS data
activate ZB burst status
menu
select reports
Figure 4-11 Menu 21 Screen Display
Table 4-15 Menu 21 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Item Description
P: get channel card
ethernet parms
Displays the Ethernet parameters of the channel card, including the
MAC address, the IP address, the gateway IP address, the host name,
the DHCP status, and the DHCP server IP address.
B: request SBB
configuration
Displays the SwiftBroadband configuration.
I: get channel card IMEI key Displays the IMEI key of the channel card.
N: GPS-assisted IRS data Displays the GPS-assisted precision configuration for SBB.
23-15-30
4-52
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(j) Menu 30
Figure 4-12 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 30 screen
display.
Table 4-16 describes some of the items available in Menu 30.
NOTE: For more information about PIM testing, refer to "Passive
Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16.
MENU 30
FIRMWARE Vx.x GND
list PIMBIT parameters
fakeout PIMBIT parameters
 N next menu
 O
initiate manual PIMBIT
initiate/stop PIMBIT
previous menu
= select reports
Figure 4-12 Menu 30 Screen Display
Table 4-16 Menu 30 Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Item Description
L: list PIMBIT
parameters
List the parameters used during PIM testing including transmit and receive
channel frequencies.
M: initiate manual
PIMBIT
Start the manual PIM test. Do not use.
N: initiate/stop PIMBIT Start the automatic PIM test.
(6) Report Descriptions
When testing or troubleshooting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, monitoring real-time
system data is sometimes required. Figure 4-13 shows all the reports potentially
available to a Level 2 user.
Most reports are used for factory debugging purposes only. This document describes
only the reports typically used in the field for operational and fault isolation testing.
NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU reports that appear
may differ from those shown as an example in Figure 4-13.
23-15-30
4-53
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
1 OFF OFF messages to card #1
2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1
3 OFF OFF responses from card #1
4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1
5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info
6 OFF sb antenna arinc input
7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word
8 OFF sb antenna status word
9 OFF channel card call status
10 OFF channel card THA codes
11 OFF channel card errors
12 OFF IRS input
13 OFF messages to card #2
14 OFF hex output to card #2
15 OFF responses from card #2
16 OFF hex input from card #2
17 OFF card #2 misc info
18 OFF port antenna arinc input
19 OFF port antenna maintenance word
20 OFF port antenna status word
21 OFF call codes
22 OFF spot beam selection
23 OFF standard output
24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPA arinc i/o
HPA/channel card backoffs
miscellaneous digital inputs
channel card A_AM msgs
multi-control arinc bus
ocean region info
hex input from data i/o
hex output to data i/o
input from data i/o
changes in multi-control bus
unit test call setup
combined-mode power allotment
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
extended call codes
multi-control time and date
OFF debug channel card power
non-zero channel card power
m4 availability status
channel card frequencies
enthusiastic messages from HPA
channel card boot sequence
debug honeywell combined mode
CFDS debugging
vt100 scenario
DATA I/O events
76
77
78
79
86
87
89
91
92
93
94
95
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
save to EEPROM
HSD-X arinc messages
HSD-X net configuration
vt100 eirp/power
dialtone debugging
Channel card rx attenuation
interworking report
debug call teardown
HSD frequencies
intermod debugging
spot beam debugging
vt100 channel card info
vt100 debugging
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
23-15-30
save to EEPROM
combined-mode debugging
enthusiastic combined-mode debug
delta combined-mode debugging
sdu path cable calibration
hpa calibration (gain droop)
combined mode ocean region debug
hpa resets
channel card temperature
hexadecimal IRS input
main loop latency
main loop timing
one second tick
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
52
54
60
61
62
64
65
66
67
68
69
72
save to EEPROM
4-54
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
96 OFF IRS data rate
107 OFF unusual channel card msgs
108 OFF channel card rf pwr detect
109 OFF channel card power SU's
110 OFF underdraft debugging
111 OFF miscellaneous digital outputs
112 OFF arinc labels
113 OFF channel card sw loads
114 OFF all channel card THA codes
115 OFF OCXO state toggles
116 OFF DATA I/O passthrough mode
117 OFF output to data i/o (ascii)
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
channel card rf loopback
I2C controller i/o
I2C controller hex i/o
I2C slave status
I2C miscellaneous input
enthusiastic backoff
PA mute debugging
PA BITE status
calibrated power detectors
power supply dc current
VSWR monitoring
I2C output to PA
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
130
131
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
misc temperatures
duart channel hex input
LES access codes
MCDU/WSC #1 arinc input
MCDU/WSC #2 arinc input
arinc output to MCDU/WSC
MCDU/WSC state machine
ascii digital inputs
W'burg messages to CMU
W'burg messages from CMU (hex)
W'burg messages from CMU
lo-level W'burg labels from CMU
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
154
155
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MCDU driver errors
ADC raw values
classic AERO call progress
AES status
AERO SUs for this terminal
1252-A-3400 status
vt100 mcdu
periodic messages to CMU
enthusiastic digital inputs
615 data loader upgrades
615 data loader debugging
max 615 debugging
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
178
179
180
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
23-15-30
save to EEPROM
next W'burg LDU
W'burg state changes
all input from CMU (hex)
periodic messages from CMU
arinc hex output to CMU
USIM heater control
AERO logging text -- no SU
ACARS P-channel RX data
all AERO SUs
AERO msg acks
non-periodic msgs to aero card
AES status table queries
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
save to EEPROM
channel card reset cycles
CMC arinc in
CMC arinc out
WSC data structs
CMC data structs
vt100 CUG info
BGAN registrations
Alt Discrete status
CP/SCM ORT I/O
power bursts
channel card burst stats
channel card burst trace
4-55
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off
X turn off all reports
 N show next page
save to EEPROM
ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU
181 OFF data i/o call reports
194 OFF PA reset cycles
182 OFF recovery after BGAN inert
195 OFF sys table protection algorithm
183 OFF debug CC#1 rx parser
199 OFF classic AERO call status
184 OFF debug CC#2 rx parser
202 OFF CFDS pages sent to CMC
185 OFF dio / cc call matchup
203 OFF generic HD710 faults
187 OFF antenna steering OLS labels
188 OFF over-power protection algorithm 1 OFF OFF messages to card #1
189 OFF expanded IRS input
2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1
190 OFF miscellaneous debugging
3 OFF OFF responses from card #1
191 OFF WSCI telephony
4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1
192 OFF CMU status words
5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info
193 OFF output to antenna controller
6 OFF sb antenna arinc input
Figure 4-13 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports
(7) Activating Maintenance Reports
To automatically generate report 23 (standard output) in Level 1 menu access, press
the EQUAL SIGN. The report data output is repeated on the computer display at
one-second intervals.
Level 2 maintenance access provides more flexibility in the use of the reports
function. This access level permits the activation or deactivation of any one of the
reports (toggle on and off).
(a) Reports General Guidelines
•
To open the report menu, press EQUAL SIGN.
•
To activate a report, type the number of the report needed, and then press
ENTER. This toggles on the report number entered. To toggle the report off,
type the report number again, and then press ENTER.
•
To disable all reports (toggles all reports off), press X.
•
To display the next group of reports, press CTRL+N.
•
To save all selected reports to EEPROM, press S. The selected reports will
then be output automatically when the maintenance port is accessed. If the
items selected are not saved, they are de-activated when the system is reset
or power is cycled to the terminal.
•
To start the scrolling report display, press ESC (in Level 2 access only). To
return to the menu selection screen, press ESC again.
(b) Report Descriptions
Not all the reports are used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system. This
section describes only the more commonly used reports.
23-15-30
4-56
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
1. Reports 23 and 94
Report 23 is the most comprehensive report, giving a general impression of
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal health. An example of the contents of report
23 is shown in Figure 4-14. Table 4-17 provides an example and a brief
description of the parameters. Each distinct parameter is numbered for
description purposes.
The output of report 23 scrolls continuously on screen and disrupts other
items on screen. Report 94 provides identical information that does not
disrupt other items on screen.
18:42:31 dop **** az 0.0 deg
el 45.0 deg ant
CHAN #1: C/No=40.6 dB Hz sig=-42.4 dB
39.0 C
CHAN #2: C/No=40.7 dB Hz sig=-41.4 dB
39.0 C
CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= 0.0 dB
38.0 C
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
39.0 C
44D0'0.3"N 74D51'8.8"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 83.9D
gain 12.0 (p/t)
no dial beam=255
no dial beam=255
log off beam=0
no call beam=0
TK 0.0D 0 knots ********
Figure 4-14 Example Report 23 Output
Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions
Report 23 Text
Description
18:42:31
Time based on the system real time clock
dop ****
Doppler frequency offset; increases with velocity (see note below)
az 0.0 deg
Antenna azimuth pointing to the satellite, with respect to the nose of the
aircraft
el 45.0 deg
Antenna elevation angle to the satellite, with respect to the horizontal
position of the aircraft
ant gain 12.0 (p/t) Reported antenna gain for the selected antenna: starboard (sbd) or port
(p/t)
CHAN #1:
Indicates the channel card for which results 14 to 17 relate
C/No=40.6 dB Hz
RF input Carrier-to-Noise (C/No) level; typically 50.0 to 55.0
sig=-42.4 dB
RF input signal level; not to exceed 0 when in-call
Note: The signal level for channels 1, 2, 3,4, and 5 may be different.
39.0 C
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal internal LRU temperature
Note: Operating the terminal above 55C is not recommended.
no dial
System call status
beam=255
Satellite beam on which the card is registered
44D0'0.3"N
74D51'8.8"W
IRS lat/long as interpreted by the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
PT 0.0D
Aircraft pitch angle, where UP is positive
RL 0.0D
Aircraft roll angle, where clockwise is positive
23-15-30
4-57
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions (Continued)
Report 23 Text
Description
HD 83.9D
Aircraft true heading; where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, based on
yaw offset
TK 0.0D
Aircraft true track; direction the aircraft is flying—not necessarily the
direction it is pointing (see note below)
0 knots
Aircraft velocity
NOTE: When the aircraft is stationary, the field may appear as a series of
asterisks (*).
2. Reports 5 and 17
Report 5 displays information for channel card 1, and report 17 displays
information for channel card 2.
These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system
and are only available to Level 2, maintenance access users.
You are prompted to select the channel(s) for which to generate a report:
WHICH GAN CHANNEL (1,2,B,X) ?
Figure 4-15 Prompt to Select Channel for Report Generation
The options are:
•
1 for channel 1
•
2 for channel 2
•
B for both channels
•
X to deselect all channels
In report 17 for channel card 2, you can select channel 3, channel 4, both
channels, or deselect all channels.
NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's
selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those
shown in the example in Figure 4-16.
CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= 0.0 dB log off beam=0 bt=OK oc=NA
tx
0 Hz burst 0
38.0 C int=8080
Figure 4-16 Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 3
3. Reports 8 and 20
Report 8 displays the status of the starboard antenna, and report 20 displays
the status of the port antenna.
23-15-30
4-58
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system
and are only available to Level 2, maint access users.
NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's
selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those
shown in the example in Figure 4-17.
port status $608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL gain=12.0
OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active
HGA
LNA=on
Figure 4-17 Example of Report 20
Table 4-18 shows descriptions of the items in reports 8 and 20.
Table 4-18 Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions
Report 8 and 20
Starboard and Port Antenna Status
(Hex code) -
Raw hex code of the 32-bit ARINC word—decoded message follows code
(SDI) -
Antenna being used (for mechanically steered, only Port data is valid)
(SSM) -
Antenna serviceability
(Gain) -
Reported antenna gain (may vary with increased blockage or keyhole
pointing)
(Mode) -
Reports tracking status, antenna selection, and high gain mode
(LNA) -
Power-on status
4. Report 21
Report 21 displays the call code information for the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal.
Figure 4-18 shows an example of report 21. Table 4-19 describes the items
in report 21.
23:48:36 #1 123ABC
41.5 C 51 dB Hz
23:48:39 #1 123ABC
23:49:20 #2 456DEF
41.5 C 52 dB Hz
23:49:24 #2 456DEF
23:49:27 #2 456DEF
41.5 C 52 dB Hz
23:49:32 #2 456DEF
23:49:36 #2 456DEF
41.5 C 51 dB Hz
23:49:40 #2 456DEF
E4 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration
E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz
E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration
E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz
E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration
E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz
E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration
E5 stop 8301
ACSE successful ORR
41.5 C
52 dB Hz
Figure 4-18 Example Report 21
23-15-30
4-59
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-19 Report 21 Item Descriptions
Report 21
Call Codes
(Time) -
Time based on the system real time clock
(Fwd Addr) -
Forward address ID assigned to the system channel cards
(Alpha/no.) -
OR and beam the card is logged on to
(Call) -
Call real-time status, service type code, and Inmarsat Cause Code (see Appendix
H: Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1)
(RF power) -
LES/GES requested HPA power in dBW
(OR status) -
OR registration status
(Call orig)
Call originating from MES or from a fixed location
(Call type)
Call types (for example, speech)
D. Inmarsat Cause Codes
The fault definitions that appear in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance menu
logs are based directly on the cause code definitions provided by Inmarsat. Appendix H:
Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures
You can perform all test procedures presented in this section to test the total operational
status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can conduct these operational tests for all
terminals returned to service after repair.
The procedures assume that the technical personnel are familiar with the test equipment
used and can operate the equipment to produce the required inputs and obtain the
required results (indications). Refer to the detailed operating procedures and descriptions
of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU included in this section.
CAUTION: ONLY AUTHORIZED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL WHO ARE TRAINED IN
GENERAL AVIATION WORKMANSHIP AND HAVE A BASIC
UNDERSTANDING OF SATCOM SYSTEMS SHOULD PERFORM THE
OPERATIONAL AND DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROCEDURES IN THIS
MANUAL.
23-15-30
4-60
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
CAUTION: CHANGES TO DEFAULT VALUES FOR SOME MENU FUNCTIONS MAY
SERIOUSLY DEGRADE SYSTEM OPERATION.
NOTE: This manual describes the basic MPU functions, menus, and reports required
for the testing and fault isolation procedures presented in this section. Please
consult Honeywell Product Support before entering any unfamiliar menu
selections not described in this manual.
NOTE: Using a terminal emulation program, open a log file and save all test results for
future reference and test records.
NOTE: The procedures presented in this section aid technical personnel in upgrading,
maintaining, or troubleshooting an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Maintenance
does not imply lubrication or adjustment activities.
Refer to the Outline and Installation diagrams and the Interconnection and Contact
Assignment drawings presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 for additional information.
(1) Test Setup Procedure
The test setup procedure is presented in Table 4-20. For detailed connection of test
equipment and operating instructions for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see
"Terminal Maintenance Port Utility" on page 4-36
Table 4-20 Test Setup Procedure
Step
Action
1.0
Make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is powered down and disconnected
from the power source.
2.0
Connect a maintenance cable to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front-panel or remote
maintenance port connector.
3.0
Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of the computer.
4.0
Open a log file to capture all test data.
(2) Post Test
When testing is completed, follow the steps in Table 4-21.
Table 4-21 Post Test Procedure
Step
Action
1.0
Save the log file of the test results (or data) for future reference.
2.0
Remove power from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that was tested and from all
other test equipment.
3.0
Disconnect test equipment from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
4.0
Replace the maintenance-port connector cover (if it was removed during the test
setup).
23-15-30
4-61
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(3) Installation and Operational Verification Tests
The test procedures assume that an approved ARINC 741 compatible antenna
subsystem has been completely installed and tested as per the manufacturer's
instructions.
To facilitate and document the installation of the equipment, refer to "Installation
Checklist" on page E-1.
(a) Pre Power-up Checks
Carry out all mechanical and electrical verification tests in the systematic order
presented in this document.
(b) Mechanical Verification
Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed mechanical information.
Table 4-22 itemizes recommended mechanical checks.
Table 4-22 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification
STEP
1. 0
2. 0
Item Checked
Verification Description
Mounting tray
Make sure that service/maintenance ports are accessible.
Physical
placement
Check that environmental characteristics and specifications are
met, including cooling, air-flow, and pressure
Fan tray
Confirm plug configuration is correct.
Check chassis bonding.
Make sure that fan rotation is unobstructed and rotates freely.
3. 0
ARINC 600
connector
Check polarized pins.
(c) Electrical Verification
Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed electrical information. Table 4-23
itemizes the recommended electrical checks.
When conducting the following tests, do not rack the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE, USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING THE VOLTAGE
LEVEL MEASUREMENTS.
Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist
STEP
1.0
Item Checked
Verification Description
Power connections 28 V dc polarity or 115 V ac polarity
Chassis ground @ BP8—resistance measurement
23-15-30
4-62
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist (Continued)
STEP
2.0
Item Checked
Voltage levels
Verification Description
CAUTION: WHEN POWER IS APPLIED TO THE RACK, THE
FAN ENERGIZES.
Check voltage levels:
28 V dc: between BP2 (positive) and BP3 (return)
or
115 V ac: between BPI (115-H) and BP7 (115-C)
3.0
IRS Input
IRS wiring:
Inertial system wired to TP4J (A) and TP4K (B)
IRS format:
ARINC 429 Interface
4.0
Configuration
Strap Pins
SDI:
Strapped for HGA, Pin TP5B to TP5D
System configuration:
Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10
ICAO ID:
User specific address obtained from the aircraft registration
WOW: optional
5.0
Ethernet 1 and 2
Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution points
Optional—other service may be preferred
6.0
ISDN 1
Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution points
Optional—other service may be preferred
7.0
CEPT-E1
Wired to CTU - optional
8.0
Remotes
(optional but
recommended)
Remote reset switch
RF coaxial
Rx input cable loss from DLNA J2 to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at
BP12
9.0
Maintenance port, remote access
Power and fault indicators
Tx output cable loss from HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at MPC1 to
DLNA J3
10.0
Multi-control and Antenna manufacturer and model
BITE from antenna Multi-Control loopbacks installed at TP3E and TP3F
subsystem
(4) Configuration Parameters Verification
You can verify the system configuration parameters. For additional connection and
access information, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37. Verify and
document the parameters using the lists in "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.
23-15-30
4-63
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(a) Parameter Verification Procedure
•
From Menu 3, press H (list SCM/CP ORT), and then press 1 (CP EEPROM
ORT).
The ORT listing appears on the screen, as shown in Figure 4-19. Verify that the
correct system configuration parameters are listed in the ORT.
23-15-30
4-64
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
0 lists SCM ORT -- 1 lists CP EEPROM ORT -- 2 lists CP ORT OPTIONS ?
CP EEPROM ORT: ID A8E09293
VERSION 30026
4-WIRE #1 NOISE LEVEL:
-50
4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER LEVEL:
50
4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL:
70
4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE LEVEL:
50
4-WIRE #2 NOISE LEVEL:
-50
4-WIRE #2 SPEAKER LEVEL:
50
4-WIRE #2 MIC LEVEL:
70
4-WIRE #2 SIDETONE LEVEL:
50
MCDU TYPE:
HONEYWELL NOT DEFAULT
HSD SAL:
307
LOG-ON/HANDOVER POLICY:
MANUAL NOT DEFAULT
HIGH RATE R/T IN GLOBAL BEAM:
DISABLED
RESPONSE TO LOG-ON INTERROGATION:
DISABLED
CMU INPUTS SPEED SELECT:
LOW RATE
FORWARD ID:
123ABC
NOT DEFAULT
AIR/GROUND STATUS RESTRICTIONS:
DISABLED
HSD (HPA) - ANTENNA LOSS:
2.5 dB
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
MCDU
MAINT
MAINT
MCDU
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
HIT 'H' for MORE
MAINT CMD EXECUTION IN AIR:
DISABLED
TRANSMIT ON GROUND:
DISABLED
MCDU/WSCI #1 WIRED:
YES
MCDU/WSCI #2 WIRED:
YES
MCDU/WSCI #3 WIRED:
NO
CMU #1 WIRED:
YES
CMU #2 WIRED:
NO NOT DEFAULT
A/C GNSS EQUIPMENT:
GPS
PRIMARY IRS TYPE:
INERTIAL
SECONDARY IRS TYPE:
AES ID NOT DEFAULT
CMC TYPE:
BOEING
MCDU/WSCI CONTROLLER TYPE:
MCDU
MCDU/WSCI INPUT SPEED:
LOW RATE
MCDU/WSCI OUTPUT SPEED:
LOW RATE NOT DEFAULT
SECONDARY IRS INPUT SPEED SELECT:
HIGH RATE
COCKPIT CALL SIGNALLING MODE:
CD1/CD2 DISCRETE
INSTALLED DIPLEXER TYPE:
TYPE F
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
SET BY MAINT
NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
PORT
HIT 'H' for MORE
ANTENNA TYPE:
ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT
SET BY MAINT PORT
ALLOW MANUAL DIAL:
ENABLED
SET BY MAINT PORT
SELF-TEST IN AIR:
ENABLED NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
ANTENNA MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE:
0.0 deg
SET BY MAINT PORT
ANTENNA MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE:
0.0 deg
SET BY MAINT PORT
ANTENNA MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE:
0.0 deg
SET BY MAINT PORT
CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL:
NO NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
MCDU PAST:
ENABLED
SET BY MAINT PORT
CMU-SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION:
PERIODIC
SET BY MAINT PORT
NUMBER CG-710 INSTALLED:
SET BY MAINT PORT
NUMBER CR-710 INSTALLED:
SET BY MAINT PORT
CARD #1 SBB/S64 PRIORITY:
"SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64"
SWIFTBROADBAND TIMING MODE:
NOT ASSISTED
SET BY MAINT PORT
SW FIELD LOADABLE:
ENABLED NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SERVICE TYPE PRIORITY:
PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE
SET BY MAINT PORT
CEPT E1 WIRED:
YES
SET BY MAINT PORT
CMC WIRED:
YES NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
HIT 'H' for MORE
CMC MASK FAULT:
DISABLED
MASK POSITION IN LOGS:
DISABLED
ICAO CODE SOURCE:
STRAP
CMU OUTPUT SPEED SELECT:
LOW RATE
POTS SERVICE:
ENABLED
CEPT E1 INTERFACE TYPE:
ARINC 746
GROUND TO COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREFERENCE:
GROUND PUBLIC ROUTING PREFERENCE:
COCKPIT
4-WIRE #2 WIRED:
YES NOT DEFAULT
ETHERNET #1 WIRED:
NO NOT DEFAULT
ETHERNET #2 WIRED:
YES
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
4-WIRE #2 NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
SET BY MAINT PORT
23-15-30
4-65
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MCDU FONT COLOUR:
ENABLED NOT DEFAULT
SET BY MAINT PORT
COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL SIGNALING:
DISABLED
SET BY MAINT PORT
COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT:
ENABLED
SET BY MAINT PORT
PIMBIT AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLES:
SET BY MAINT PORT
HGA = 11.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT
IGA = 15.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT
PIMBIT IGA ELEVATION ANGLES:
SET BY MAINT PORT
ANGLE 1 = 18.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT
ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG NOT DEFAULT
PIMBIT HGA ELEVATION ANGLES:
SET BY MAINT PORT
ANGLE 1 = 27.6 DEG
ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG
NOT DEFAULT
NOT DEFAULT
HIT 'H' for MORE
PIMBIT TEST CRITERIA:
SET BY MAINT PORT
MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO = 25.5% NOT DEFAULT
FAILURE THRESHOLD = 25.5 dB NOT DEFAULT
POINTING FAILURE THRESHOLD = 255 NOT DEFAULT
HIT 'H' for MORE
DIO BLOCK:
de 8e 6a
0c 8f 09
e8 62 87
29 c0 a8
04 1c d2
44 61 74
86 BYTES -- TYPE
67 00 50 de 96 e9
6e 1c d2 5b 2e de
a2 fc f4 79 de ce
00 05 9b d3 2c 30
69 6e de c3 0b e5
61 49 4f
1 CRC
74 00
92 88
eb 70
00 a1
00 0b
D3CD
39 1c
f0 00
00 0e
de 82
c7 86
b6
09
ac
6d
3b
5b
0c
d3
30
ad
b5
96
2c
00
06
..jg.P...t.9..[.
...n..[.........
.b....y...p....,
)......,0....m0.
...in........;..
DataIO
ETHERNET 1 ADDRESS 192.168.0.1
ETHERNET 1 MASK 255.255.255.0
ETHERNET 2 ADDRESS 0.0.0.0
ETHERNET 2 MASK 255.255.255.0
DHCP CLIENT DISABLED
HOST NAME DataIO
DHCP SERVER DISABLED
START OF MANAGED RANGE 192.168.0.100
SNMP SERVER ENABLED
SNMP COMMUNITY STRING public
NUMBER OF MANAGED ADDRESSES 50
TFTP SERVER DISABLED
ETHERNET DUPLEX MODE 0
TELNET ACCESS ENABLED
ALLOW SCPC SESSIONS TRUE
ALLOW MPDS SESSIONS TRUE
ALLOW BGAN SESSIONS TRUE
ACCESS CONCENTRATOR NAME DataIO
DEFAULT PPPOE SERVICE PacketData
ACCESS POINT NAME
AT WELCOME MESSAGE
HIT 'H' for MORE
VP BLOCK:
MISSING
TOOL VERSION = XXXX
TOOL NAME = EMBEDDED ORT TOOL
TOOL PART NUMBER = jaytool
SECURE ORT PART NUMBER = sss123
USER ORT PART NUMBER = uuu456
SATELLITE TABLE:
REGION 0:
AORW (W) 52.0W
REGION 1:
AORE (E) 15.5W
REGION 2:
POR (P) 178.0E
REGION 3:
IOR (I) 64.0E
REGION 4:
MTSAT (4) 142.5E
REGION 5:
APAC (5) 143.5E
REGION 6:
EMEA (6) 25.0E
REGION 7: AMERICAS (7) 98.0W
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
CLASSIC
AERO
AERO
AERO
AERO
AERO
AERO
AERO
AERO
SWIFT64
SWIFT64
SWIFT64
SWIFT64
BGAN
BGAN
BGAN
23-15-30
4-66
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
LES INFORMATION:
AORW: LES 2
AORE: LES 2
POR: LES 2
IOR: LES 2
NETWORK
NETWORK
NETWORK
NETWORK
SATELLITE FREQUENCY TABLE:
REGION 0: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
REGION 1: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
REGION 2: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
REGION 3: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
REGION 4: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
REGION 5: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2BA0,$9E
REGION 7: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS:
ID
ID
ID
ID
LES 2
NO NAME
NO NAME
NO NAME
$FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $3702,$6B8 NCS FREQS: $24EC,$4EC
$FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36FE,$6B6 NCS FREQS: $2504,$B60
$FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4,$700 NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF
$FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2,$6FC NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF
$FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7,$8F7 NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF
$2AF2,$2A AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA,$6DA NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF REGION 6:
AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE,$6DE NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF
$2A4C,$4 AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$6DC NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF
HIT 'H' for MORE
GES PRIORITY TABLE:
ENTRY #1 AORW
Aussaguel
ENTRY #2 AORW
Eik
ENTRY #3 AORE
Aussaguel
ENTRY #4 AORE
Eik
ENTRY #5 POR
Perth
ENTRY #6 POR
Santa Paula
ENTRY #7 IOR
Perth
ENTRY #8 IOR
Eik
ENTRY #9 APAC
Hawaii
ENTRY #10 EMEA
Fucino
ENTRY #11 AMERICAS Hawaii
ENTRY #12 MTSAT Kobe
(GES 5)
PRIORITY 5
(GES 2)
PRIORITY 5
(GES 103) PRIORITY 5
(GES 104) PRIORITY 5
(GES 205) PRIORITY 5
(GES 202) PRIORITY 5
(GES 305) PRIORITY 5
(GES 301) PRIORITY 5
(GES 120) PRIORITY 5
(GES 220) PRIORITY 5
(GES 320) PRIORITY 5
(GES 161) PRIORITY 5
PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 1
95
AAAAB
96
JJJJJJ
97
CCCC
98
QQQQQQ
99
ALPHATEXT
100
DDDDD
(CATEGORY01):
0016135919208
666666
5555
55555555
999999
99999
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
NON-OP
OP-LO
OP-LO
PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 2
91
HHHHH
92
KKKKKK
94
BBBA
95
CCCC
96
AAAAB
97
LLLLL
98
AAAAA
99
AAAA
100 01-NUM IN CAT2
(CATEGORY02):
22222
11111
22222
9999
11111
33333
22222
66666
0116135601122
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-HI
PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 3
96
BBBBB
97
AAAAC
98
BBBBA
99
AAAAA
100 01-NUM IN CAT3
(CATEGORY03):
88888
2222
22222
22222
0116135601123
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 4
95
AAAAAB
96
CCCCC
97
AAAAC
99
AAAA
100 01-NUM IN CAT4
(CATEGORY04):
77777
11114
33333
5555
0116135601124
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
OP-LO
NON-OP
DONE
Figure 4-19 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display Example
23-15-30
4-67
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(5) System Power-up Checks
NOTE: Before proceeding, make sure that all pre power-up, mechanical, and
electrical verifications have been successfully performed and documented
using "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.
(a) Preparation
The following tests serve primarily to confirm proper system power-up; therefore,
they can be performed while the aircraft is still in the hangar. Make sure that a
computer is available for testing.
(b) Initial Visual LED Verification
The system's Power On and Fault LEDs provide a visual status indication on the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel and on the optional remote panel.
To visually verify LEDs:
1. Verify that the LED indicators (at both locations) repeatedly cycle on/off when
power is applied.
2. Once the cycle has completed (~5 seconds), verify that the LED power
indicator remains illuminated.
(c) Initial Computer Power up Display
With the computer connected and configured to accept maintenance port data,
power-up the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and verify the initial power-up screen
displays, as shown in Figure 4-20.
23-15-30
4-68
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
KERNEL V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010
TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.
CONFIDENTIAL PROPERTY OF EMS TECHNOLOGIES CANADA, LTD.
USE AND DISTRIBUTION LIMITED SOLELY TO AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.
The use, disclosure, reproduction, modification, transfer or transmittal of
this work for any purpose, in any form, or by any means without the written
permission of EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. is strictly prohibited.
Copyright 2010 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
HSD APPLICATION V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010
CMC INTERFACE: SUPPORTED
WSC INTERFACE:
SUPPORTED
VALIDATING DETECTOR CALIBRATION TABLES.... OK
VALIDATING ATTENUATOR CALIBRATION TABLE AT $608000.... OK
RAM RUN-TIME DATABASE
OCEAN REGION
SAT LONG
LES ID
TNID
SERVICES
**W AORW
(region #0)
54.0W
SW64/AERO
**E AORE
(region #1)
15.0W
SW64/AERO
**P POR
(region #2) 178.5E
SW64/AERO
**I IOR
(region #3)
64.5E
SW64/AERO
**4 MTSAT
(region #4) 142.5E
AERO
**5 APAC
(region #5) 144.0E
AERO/SBB
**6 EMEA
(region #6)
25.5E
AERO/SBB
**7 AMERICAS
(region #7)
97.5W
AERO/SBB
** LONGITUDE UPDATED FROM AERO BULLETIN BOARDS
REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 12:50:18 Wed Jan 2, 2001
FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1
CHANNEL #1 FORWARD ID 442BF5
4.7 SECONDS: STAND-ALONE MODE
FIRMWARE VERSIONS:
KERNEL:
APPLICATION:
CHANNEL CARD #1:
CHANNEL CARD #2:
DATA I/O CARD:
VOICE PROCESSOR:
VP BOOT LOADER:
SPOTBEAM TABLE:
V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010
V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010
4.9.G.0 -- 1.0.2.0 -- 2.1.0.0 -- 4.2.3.0
31.5.0.1 -Version 1.87.0.0 built on Mar 16 2010 12:15:16
Version 1.2.3.DEV built on Mar 31 2010 at 23:27:20
Version 1.2.1 built on Wednesday October 21 2009 at 14:04:24
PROVIDED BY SATELLITE
CHANNEL CARD STATISTICS
CARD #1 BGAN 6X (SERIAL 6203):
3036.1 hrs powered 266.6 hrs in call since 10:40:26 Feb 12, 2009
CARD #2 CLASSIC AERO (SERIAL 36500):
2635.1 hrs powered 1507.3 hrs in call since 10:17:37 Feb 27, 2001
BGAN INTERFACE
IMEI
SVN
IMSI
CARD #1
12345678912345 01
987654321123456
CHECKING FLASHPROM CONFIGURATION .............
HARDWARE:
EMS:
PART NUMBER
1252-A-3800-01
REVISION
A01
23-15-30
4-69
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
SOFTWARE:
EMS:
BOOT
APP.
CC #1
CC #2
PART NUMBER
LI-1252-38015
CRC:
CRC:
CRC:
CRC:
SECURE ORT:
USER ORT:
REVISION
XXX
5249CAFF
A3A3D6B7
CBA1
9F4E
sss123
uuu456
** MODIFIED **
** MODIFIED **
Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.
Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.
time 21.5 seconds: powering on channel card 2
time 23.1 seconds: powering on channel card 1
Figure 4-20 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example
(6) System On-Air Checks
Conduct system on-air checks to confirm voice and data call capabilities through the
satellite and ground station network. Additional testing confirms that proper signal
level parameters are obtained through the antenna subsystem.
(a) Preparation
Before attempting on-air testing procedures:
1. Complete and confirm all service provider registration and activation.
2. Complete and document all pre power-up and power-up checks.
3. Position the aircraft outside, away from all obstructions in the line-of-sight to
the satellite.
4. Apply the aircraft power source.
5. Power on and wait for the IRS to align.
6. Connect a computer (with a terminal emulation program) to the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port.
NOTE: Several system parameters, such as IRS data, RF signal quality,
and logon messaging, appear on the maintenance port display.
Capture and save this maintenance port information to a file for later
review or to serve as a historical test record.
(b) On-Air Power up and Logon Procedure
For this test procedure, use the Level 2 password to access the HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal MPU. For information on how to connect to, access, and use the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.
To perform an on-air power up and logon:
1. With the computer connected, powered up, and ready to accept maintenance
port data, power up the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
2. Once the power up messages appear, type the Level 2 password maint.
23-15-30
4-70
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
3. To access the reports menu, press EQUAL SIGN, and then activate reports
21 (call codes) and 23 (standard output).
Remember to save these selected items by pressing S (save to EEPROM).
4. To reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in Menu 2, press Z, and then
immediately type the password maint when the reset messages appear.
The data from the previously selected reports 21 and 23 appears. This data
refreshes on-screen every second. You can capture this information in a log
file for later review or pause the display by pressing SCROLL LOCK or
highlighting part of the viewed data.
5. Compare the output data to the sample shown in Figure 4-21.
You can review and document several parameters for operational verification
purposes. Refer to "Installation Checklist" on page E-1 for a detailed list of
parameters.
6. Verify that the following system information, as shown on the System
Initialization Display during the test, is accurate for the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal under test.
•
FWD ID
•
Installation mode
•
Number of channel cards
•
All channel cards trigger OR registration
(c) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification
Once the system has logged on, place a test voice and/or data call. Refer to
"System Operation" on page 2-1 for detailed call procedures. Verification of all
aircraft communication functions is recommended. Record the test call result on
"Installation Checklist" on page E-1.
NOTE: For the purposes of providing a sample display, an ISDN voice call is
documented.
(d) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification Procedure
To place an on-air voice or data call:
1. Make sure that the maintenance port reports 21 and 23 are activated.
2. Place a test call.
3. Observe the maintenance port messages, and verify that they are similar to
the sample provided in Figure 4-21.
23-15-30
4-71
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:39 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No=51.4 dB Hz sig=-31.4 dB
41.5 C no call beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-26.1 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:40 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 41.5 C 52 dB Hz
17:12:40 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.2 dB
41.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-32.9 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz sig=-26.2 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:42 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 41.5 C 52 dB Hz
17:12:42 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-1000 dB
41.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-33.7 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz sig=-26.2 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:44 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-19.6 dB
41.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-32.7 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.8 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:49 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No=62.2 dB Hz sig=-19.9 dB
41.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.9 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:51 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No=61.8 dB Hz sig=-19.8 dB
41.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.7 dB Hz sig=-32.9 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.9 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
17:12:52 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 41.5 C 0 dB Hz
17:12:52 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)
CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-1000 dB
41.5 C no call beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB
41.5 C no call beam=5
CHAN #3: C/No=48.8 dB Hz sig=-26.1 dB
40.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
40.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
Figure 4-21 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example
(7) Antenna Tracking Checks
As a final ground-based system check, verify the antenna tracking. This confirms
proper signal reception and transmission for all aircraft headings.
23-15-30
4-72
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(a) Preparation
•
Perform all previous tests and document the results before proceeding.
•
As directed in previous tests, connect a computer to the maintenance port
and use the Level 2 password to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.
•
Power up all avionics and align the IRS.
•
Taxi or tow the aircraft to an unobstructed, line-of-sight location where a
complete 360° rotation is possible.
(b) Antenna Tracking Verification Procedure
To verify antenna tracking:
NOTE: Report 8 (starboard antenna status word) is only required where
conformal antennas are installed.
1. From the reports menu, toggle on reports 8, 20, and 23.
2. Position the aircraft at a baseline, start-of-test heading (0 degrees true
heading is recommended).
3. Confirm that the baseline heading, as reported by the aircraft IRS, is similar
to that reported from the "HD" entry in report 23.
4. Record the following data on the "Installation Checklist" on page E-1:
•
Antenna selected—port or starboard (conformal only)
•
Antenna gain and azimuth angle
•
Heading
•
Channel card C/No and signal levels
5. Rotate the aircraft through a full 360° circle while stopping to record data at
the following heading intervals:
•
For conformal or phased arrays: every 15°
•
For mechanically steered antenna: every 30°
(8) Optional System Checks
The following procedures are recommended but not essential. However, they serve
to confirm successful completion of all previous tests.
(a) Preparation
Activate reports 21 and 23 for the following checks.
(b) Optional Voice/Data Calls Procedure
NOTE: As in previous tests, open a log file to capture all maintenance port
activity during aircraft taxiing, flight, and landing segments.
•
Voice/data calls—ground segment:
Place any combination of voice and/or data calls while the aircraft is taxied
in a full circle and/or a figure 8 pattern. Note any voice or data anomalies.
23-15-30
4-73
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Voice/data calls—in flight:
Place any combination of voice and/or data calls during flight. The flight
pattern may include "standard rate of turn," figure 8, or circles. Note any
voice or data anomalies.
2. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation
This section provides troubleshooting procedures for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals experiencing
faults during the commissioning process or previously operational terminals now considered as
not working.
Troubleshooting procedures require data obtained using the MPU of the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminals. For specific instructions on how to access and use the maintenance port and MPU,
refer to "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.
A. Troubleshooting Practices
Troubleshooting practices for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal fall into two categories:
non-specific and specific complaints.
(1) Non-specific Complaints
When troubleshooting terminals with non-specific complaints, complete all system
verification and functional tests starting on page 4–60. Document whether the
terminal passes or fails each test.
If the terminal passes all tests and no fault is discovered, all associated equipment
and aircraft wiring should be tested.
If the terminal fails a specific test, isolate the actual fault or faults by performing the
troubleshooting procedures provided in this section.
(2) Specific Complaints
When troubleshooting terminals with specific complaints, you can proceed directly
to the applicable troubleshooting and fault isolation procedure provided in this
section.
B. Equipment Required
The equipment required for troubleshooting and fault isolation is the same as the
equipment required for test purposes, as listed in "Test and Fault Isolation Equipment
Requirements" on page 4-35.
C. Troubleshooting Aids
This section presents examples of maintenance screens and troubleshooting tables to
assist in troubleshooting and fault isolation activities. The exact screen display may vary
depending on the version of the terminal's operational software and installation
configuration mode.
NOTE: The screens used in the figures presented in this section may have been edited
for clarity and illustrative purposes.
23-15-30
4-74
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays
Figure 4-22 to Figure 4-31 provide example maintenance screens for reference and
illustration purposes.
time 8.6 seconds: powering on channel card #2
card is already on
SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND
time 22.1 seconds CHAN #2 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!
SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND
time 22.5 seconds CHAN #1 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!
10:45:14 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration
32.0 C 54 dB Hz
10:45:15 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration
32.0 C 55 dB Hz
10:45:18 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz
10:45:19 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306 ACSE successful ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz
Figure 4-22 Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated)
10:45:14 #1 ABC123
32.0 C 54 dB Hz
10:45:15 #2 ABC456
32.0 C 55 dB Hz
10:45:18 #2 ABC456
10:45:19 #1 ABC123
E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration
E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration
E5 stop 8301
E5 stop 8306
ACSE failed retry ORR
ACSE failed retry ORR
32.0 C
32.0 C
54 dB Hz
54 dB Hz
Figure 4-23 Failed OR Registration
15:14:08 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (p/t)
CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.2 dB
42.5 C no call beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB
42.5 C no call beam=4
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-24.2 dB
41.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
41.5 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
Figure 4-24 No Call (report 23)
15:15:04 #1 442BF5 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 42.5 C 52 dB Hz
15:15:03 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg
el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (p/t)
CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB
42.5 C speech beam=4
CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-33.4 dB
42.5 C no call beam=4
CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-24.5 dB
41.0 C log on beam=4
CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB
41.0 C no call beam=4
45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft
Figure 4-25 In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23)
23-15-30
4-75
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
12:43:55 dop**** az 285.4 deg
el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)
CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-33.9 dB
27 C no call beam=4
CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-34.2 dB
27 C no call beam=4
************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******
CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-33.6 dB
27 C in call beam=4
CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-34.5 dB
27 C
no call beam=4
************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******
Figure 4-26 No IRS Data (report 23 activated)
FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1
**** strapping identifies forward id ffffff -- not in table ****
**** eeprom forward id 000000 not in table *****
7.6 SECONDS: EEPROM FORCES STAND-ALONE MODE
time 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #1
time 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #2
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** WARNINGS ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *
CHANNEL CARD FORWARD ID IS ZERO
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Figure 4-27 FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated)
23-15-30
4-76
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MENU 3
list EEPROM
clear event log
list call log
list ORT
set all LES id's
 N next menu
clear call log
 N next menu
HPA ERROR CODE 1800
hit '0' for complete log
FIRMWARE Vx.x
list event log
misc. EEPROM parameter
clear call log
ocean region parameter
 O
previous menu
select reports
 O
previous menu
select reports
'1' for 'special' events
'-' for specific entry
FAULT (ENTRY #1428): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup
powerup #204 389 hours operation Jan 01 14:19:39 2006
ERROR CODE 40
HPA FAULT -- 0x1800
HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
Continuous Power Requests From LES, Report 21 activated:
10:51:26 #2
C 54 dB/Hz
10:51:26 #1
C 54 dB/Hz
10:51:27 #2
10:51:27 #1
10:51:27 #1
C 0 dB/Hz
10:51:27 #2
C 0 dB/Hz
10:51:29 #1
C 54 dB/Hz
10:51:29 #2
C 54 dB/Hz
10:51:29 #2
ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration 30
ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration 29
ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C
ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C
ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29
ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration 30
ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29
ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30
ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW
CT SP ocean region registration 30 C
Figure 4-28 No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated)
23-15-30
4-77
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Log-on password entered: "Maint"
MENU 1
FIRMWARE Vx.x
override forward id
explain error status
print equipment stats
 N next menu
 O
HPA UNCONTROLLED
test LEDs
list event log (hex)
clear equipment stats
previous menu
= select reports
Y command entered:
HPA
HPA
HPA
HPA
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
STATUS WORD
STATUS WORD
WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR
WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)
NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
Event log messages:
MENU 3
FIRMWARE Vx.x
list EEPROM
clear event log
list call log
list ORT
set all LES id's
 N next menu
 O
list event log
misc. EEPROM parameter
clear call log
ocean region parameter
previous menu
select reports
FAULT (ENTRY #1422): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup
powerup #203 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:15:07 2003
ERROR CODE 40
HPA FAULT -- 0x1c80
HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR
HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)
HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA
Figure 4-29 Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)
11:47:43 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 50 dB/Hz
11:47:46 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 50 dB/Hz
11:47:55 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 29 C 47 dB/Hz
11:47:57 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz
calling 0116135919064#
11:48:10 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 11d2 call failed, insufficient digits in service address
28 C 0
calling 0116135919064#
Figure 4-30 Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled)
23-15-30
4-78
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active
HGA
LNA on
port maintenance 0x00600003
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port status: 0x608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 12
OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active
HGA
LNA on
port maintenance 0x00600003
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU
Figure 4-31 Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated)
(2) Troubleshooting Table
Table 4-24 provides troubleshooting procedures for basic HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
faults. Before starting a troubleshooting procedure, access the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal MPU using the maint password. For detailed connection and user
instructions, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.
23-15-30
4-79
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation
Fault
Maintenance
Report
Description
Red LED
remains on
after power-up
• HPA uncontrolled
HPA error
status
• reporting invalid SSM
• HPA fault
• HPA not reporting status word
143
• HPA not reporting maintenance
word 350
Check
View power-up
display of the
MPU
• Verify that the multicontrol,
loopback is wired (out to in).
To obtain an
explanation of
the HPA error
status, in Menu
1, press Y
• Check that the external power
source is properly connected and
meets installation requirements.
• HPA maintenance word
reporting ARINC error
• HPA maintenance word not
reporting HGA antenna
• HPA maintenance word
reporting VSWR error
• Check that the transmit path from
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal output
(MPC1) to the antenna subsystem
(e.g., coaxial cables, splitters, and
relays).
• Check that the installation location
meets the RTCA/DO-160E
environmental specifications.
• Check for proper fan-tray
operation and air-cooling.
• HPA maintenance word
reporting RAM error
• HPA reporting ROM error
• HPA maintenance word
reporting power supply error
• Verify the fan-tray plug distribution
is as per the installation
requirements.
• HPA maintenance word
reporting temperature error
23-15-30
4-80
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Fault
Call failure
Maintenance
Report
Description
IRS information not available
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
Check
• Check that the IRS systems are
powered on and aligned.
• Check that connections to the IRS
systems are secured.
• Check the polarity of IRS input
lines.
• If no IRS data is available, use
Menu 10 to manually input
navigational data to point the
antenna to a preferred satellite
location and try the call again.
System does not log on to the
global beam
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
• Check that the IRS data is
received and valid.
• Make sure that a valid FWD ID is
read.
• Verify that the antenna is pointing
in the correct direction.
• Make sure that LES/GES access
codes are configured correctly.
• Verify all coaxial connections.
System does not log on to the
correct OR
Terminal is not transmitting
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
• Check that the IRS data is
received and valid.
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
• Check for a defective or loose RF
cable.
• Check for antenna line-of-sight
interference.
• Verify that the Rx RF level is
acceptable.
• Check RF power level displayed
in maintenance port menu report
21; the EIRP should be requested
at 14.00 dBW, but when in call,
power level should increase to
22.5 dBW and then level off to
approximately 16 dBW.
• Make sure that the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal is secured
properly to the ARINC connector
in the tray.
23-15-30
4-81
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Fault
Call failure
(cont’d)
Maintenance
Report
Description
ICAO is invalid or strapped
incorrectly
Activate
maintenance
report 21
To check ICAO,
in Menu 4, press
Check
• The account registration process
has not been completed. Check
your account status with your
service provider to make sure that
the account registration has been
processed into the LES/GES
databases and your account is
valid.
• If the message, Channel card
stuck in boot state appears in
the event log, check that the
assigned ICAO is strapped
correctly.
Terminal is strapped to an
incorrect system mode of
installation
In Menu 3, press
L (List
EEPROM)
• Verify the system mode strapping
is correct.
• Reset the system and observe the
initialization display; it shows that
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is
powering up and displays the
terminal’s self-test results. The
Initialization display lists the
installation mode configuration for
the terminal.
• If the mode displayed is not
strapped or is incorrectly
strapped, a temporary setting may
be used. In Menu 3, press M
(misc. EEPROM parameters),
then type 16 (channel card
category) and configure the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to the
correct mode. Reset the terminal
and try the call again.
SBB IMSI not registered
• Call service provider
Dialing sequence was incomplete
or incorrect
Activate reports
21 and 52
• Verify the number you are calling
and try the number again.
• Make sure that you end the dialing
sequence by pressing POUND
KEY. Pressing POUND KEY at the
end of the dialing string signals the
system to send the call.
23-15-30
4-82
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Fault
Logon request
fails
Maintenance
Report
Description
Terminal is not transmitting
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
Check
• Check for defective or loose
cables.
• Check for antenna line-of-sight
interference.
• Check for HPA fault.
• Make sure that the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal is secured
properly to the ARINC connector
in the tray.
• Make sure that your account is
current and active.
Terminal is not receiving
Activate
maintenance
reports 21 and
23
• Check for defective or loose
cables.
• Make sure that the antenna
subsystem DLNA is powered.
• Check for antenna line-of-sight
interference.
• Verify that the ICAO is valid,
activated, and strapped correctly.
• Make sure that your account is
current and active.
• Make sure that the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal is secured
properly to the ARINC connector
in the tray.
Incoming call
failure
Incoming call shows as a
successful connection in report 23,
but call does not ring through to the
external device (telephone,
computer, fax).
Activate reports
21 and 23
• Check the connection between
the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
and the external device.
• Check configuration of external
devices is correct. MSN must be
configured correctly for each
device connected to the system.
• If MSNs are not programmed in
the user devices, incoming calls
will ring all devices.
NOTE: Zero is an invalid entry.
23-15-30
4-83
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Fault
Logon
successful, but
fails to
complete call
Maintenance
Report
Description
Authorization error (fault code
12C4)
Activate reports
21 and 23
Check
• Contact your service provider to
verify that the ICAO, FWD ID, and
IMSI are activated.
• Check that the ICAO is strapped
correctly.
• Check that IRS data is available
and correct.
• Check that the Veh Rel Az/EL to
Satellite is correct.
• Check that all coaxial cable
connections are secure.
• Check that the Rx C/No value is
greater than 50 dB/Hz.
• Check that the antenna is
functioning.
• Check that the primary and
secondary LES/GES access
codes are valid.
• Contact your service provider and
verify that they can "see" your Tx
signal. To contact the LES/GES
operator, dial 33, POUND KEY.
• Contact service provider and
request that they place an
incoming call to the terminal.
• Check the reported HPA back-off
in report 21. The S64 signal
should initialize at 14 dBW and
increase after handshake to
approximately 22.5 dBW, then
slowly decrease (typically to
between 16.5 dBW and 21.5 dBW
with a lower limit of 14.5 dBW).
23-15-30
4-84
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Fault
Maintenance
Report
Description
HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal is
operating
outside the
normal
environmental
specifications
Channel card temperature fault
Calls do not
complete and
connection is
not established
Channel Congestion (fault code
2024) Note: applies to Swift 64
only.
Activate reports
21 and 23
No call request sent
Activate report
52
Activate report
21 or 23
Check
• Check channel card temperature;
temperatures over 50° C may
cause the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal to shut down.
• Check that the fan tray is
operational.
• Verify that the tray plug
distribution is the same as
presented in the installation
requirements.
• Wait five minutes and try the call
again.
• Contact the LES/GES to verify
congestion. To contact the
LES/GES operator, dial 33,
POUND KEY.
• Verify that the call dial string is
correct; pressing POUND KEY at
the end of the dialing string signals
the system to send the call.
• Check that the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal is transmitting by
ensuring the LED power indicator
flashes on and off (1 Hz) during a
call request.
• Check that the ISDN, Ethernet, or
POTS cable is connected
correctly and securely.
No dial tone
heard in
handset
Activate report
21
• Confirm that ISDN lines are wired
correctly.
• Verify that handset connection is
secure.
• Wait a few minutes for the system
to warm up, then log on and try
your call again.
• Check that IRS data is available.
• Verify that the terminal has
completed beam registration.
23-15-30
4-85
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)
Maintenance
Report
Fault
Description
Call drops after
successful
connection
If the RF signal fades significantly
(during a call), the connection may
drop.
Activate reports
21 and 23
NOTE: A sudden, severe aircraft
banking angle may
obstruct the signal long
enough (>15 sec.) to drop
a call.
Check
• Check signal strength.
For Swift 64, C/No greater than or
equal to 53.2 dB.
• Make sure that there is a clear,
unobstructed, line of sight to the
satellite.
• Select an alternate satellite or
beam and try your call again.
NOTE: This troubleshooting
procedure works if you are
located where more than
one beam overlaps or
satellite is in view.
D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures
This section provides basic information required for technical personnel to isolate faults
in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Where needed, refer to other sections of this manual
(which contain important information to aid in understanding the function of the terminal)
for additional information.
Fault isolation procedures are usually conducted on equipment that falls within one of
the following categories:
•
Terminals that have failed to pass operational and installation verification procedures
•
Terminals that have failed during service
•
Terminals repaired and returned to service
CAUTION: BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES,
REFER TO THE "SAFETY ADVISORIES" ON PAGE INTRO-6.
(1) General
When performing fault isolation and diagnostic procedures, record and document all
test results, including LED functions and maintenance port data outputs (reports 21
and 23).
Enable reports 18, 19, and 20 (port), or items 6, 7, and 8 (starboard) to record
antenna, ACU, and DLNA related faults. Enable other reports as required.
(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports File
Maintenance reports are helpful in troubleshooting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Capturing maintenance port information from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and
forwarding the file to Honeywell technical support staff will assist in troubleshooting
suspected HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal problems.
23-15-30
4-86
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To save a diagnostics reports file:
1. Open a log file on the maintenance port, terminal program. (If you are using
HyperTerminal, use the "Transfer, capture text" function.)
2. Power the system on or if applicable reset the system.
3. Enter maintenance mode on the maintenance port using maint as the password.
4. To activate reports 21 and 23 and toggle off all other reports, press EQUAL SIGN.
5. To save these reports as default, press S. This enables the user to view these
reports on subsequent HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal power-ups or Reset entries.
6. Reset the system by cycling the power to the terminal; pressing the reset button
on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel; or, in Menu 2, pressing Z.
NOTE: The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be logged on to the Aero H+
service.
7. Log on to the maintenance port using the password: maint
The system restarts and ocean registration takes place (approximately two
minutes).
8. To display Menu 2, press CTRL+N.
9. To display the software versions of the system, press V.
10. Make a call from the system or execute the procedure or sequence that causes
the call failure. Make a note of the call progress. For example: Did you get a dial
tone? Was the call successful?
11. If applicable, attempt calls from the remaining three channels.
12. To display the current reports profile of the system (as noted in step 4), press
EQUAL SIGN.
13. To save an alternate reports configuration, activate the required items, and then,
to save to EEPROM, press S in the reports menu.
14. To display the ORT List, press CTRL+N until Menu 3 appears, and then press
O. (The ORT list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. To display
the next screen, press O.)
15. To list the complete event log, in Menu 3:
•
press S (list event log)
•
press 0 (list complete log)
•
press PERIOD (list all remaining entries)
16. To list the complete call log, in Menu 3:
•
press F (list call log)
•
press F again (list complete log)
•
press PERIOD (list all remaining entries)
•
for extended information, press X
17. Close the log file on the terminal program.
23-15-30
4-87
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
18. The log file is in text format (.txt file). Open the file and add notes to the beginning
of the file indicating:
•
System serial number (from the label on the front of the terminal)
•
Aircraft ID and customer name
•
Any notes about the problems encountered
•
Contact name, telephone number, and e-mail address
•
Any system anomalies or unique operating environments that may in any
way affect the system’s function (e.g., physical location of aircraft or terminal,
LES being used, list of connected devices)
19. Save the file with the date of the report in the file name.
20. E-mail the log file to Honeywell technical support.
3. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures
There are no adjustment/alignment procedures required for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.
4. Modification History
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal currently has no history of modifications.
23-15-30
4-88
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
This section provides maintenance and repair information for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal,
including the following sections:
•
Maintenance
•
Repair
•
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
1. Maintenance
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not require routine maintenance.
2. Repair
All repair procedures must be completed by Honeywell-approved repair facilities.
A. Repair Tools and Supplies
No special supplies are required to repair this equipment.
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals that require service must be returned to Honeywell or to an
Honeywell-approved service center. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for
terminal testing requirements and procedures.
B. Repair Procedures
This equipment does not require any special repair procedures.
C. Battery Replacement
The internal battery of the HSD-440 terminal cannot be replaced in the field. The unit
must be returned to factory to have the internal battery replaced.
D. Removal Procedures
If an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be removed from service for repair, remove power,
disconnect all equipment from the terminal and then remove it from the ARINC
tray.Remove the SCM from the terminal before returning the terminal for repair. You can
insert the SCM into the repaired terminal before installing it in the aircraft.
E. Repair Facility Approvals
EMS Aviation, located at 400 Maple Grove Road in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, is a
Transport Canada Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO). In accordance with the
Technical Arrangement on Maintenance between Canada and the European aviation
authority JAA, and due to the Bilateral Agreement between Canada and the United States
aviation authority FAA, EMS Aviation conforms to the maintenance requirements of JAR
145 and FAR 145 respectively.
23-15-30
5-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
F.
Return for Repair Information
Contact Honeywell International about return for repair instructions.
3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
This section presents the instructions for continued airworthiness, as per FAR 25.1529, of the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on an aircraft by supplemental type certificate
(STC) or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information
supplied by this manual in the operator's Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator's Aircraft
Scheduled Maintenance Program.
The following paragraphs describe all maintenance requirements and instructions for continued
airworthiness of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
•
Add the LRU part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in this manual to
the aircraft operator's appropriate, aircraft illustrated parts catalog (IPC).
•
Add all wiring diagram information contained in this manual to the aircraft operator's
appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are considered on-condition units. No additional or routine
maintenance is required.
•
If an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not operating, remove the terminal, secure cables and
wiring, collar applicable switches and circuit breakers, and placard them as inoperative.
Before flight, revise the equipment list and weight and balance data as applicable and record
the removal of the terminal in the log book. Refer to section 91.213 of the FAR or the aircraft's
minimum equipment list (MEL).
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can not be repaired in the field. All terminals must be returned
to the Honeywell factory or authorized repair centers for repair.
•
Repaired terminals must be re-installed on the aircraft in accordance with the instructions
provided in this manual. The operation of all repaired terminals must be verified using the
operational verification tests and procedures provided in this manual before being approved
for return to service. All special tools required to test the terminal for approval for return to
service are listed and described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35. Approval for
return to service must be entered in the logbook as required by section 43.9 of the FAR.
•
The following scheduled maintenance tasks must be added to the aircraft operator's
appropriate aircraft maintenance program:
•
Recommended periodic scheduled servicing tasks: None required.
•
Recommended periodic inspections: None required.
•
Recommended periodic scheduled preventative maintenance tests (tests to
determine system condition and/or latent failures): None required.
23-15-30
5-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
CONFIGURING THE OWNERS REQUIREMENTS TABLE
(ORT)
There are two methods of configuring ORT parameters:
•
Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU
•
Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application
When your computer is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the serial maintenance
connection, you can set ORT parameters one at a time.
Using the EMS ORT Application, you can edit various ORT parameters in one session, save and
export an ORT file, and then load the file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU
For information on creating ORTs using the MPU , see "Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port
Utility (MPU)" on page 2-4.
This section lists the parameters you can configure in both the secure partition and the user partition
of the ORT. See the individual procedure for more information.
You can use the MPU to configure the secure parameters described in Table 6-1:
Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters
Category
Section
ORT Part Number
Configuring the ORT Part Number (secure)
Cockpit Communications
Configuring the Call Signaling Mode
Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling
Configuring Ground Public Routing
4-wire
Configuring 4-wire Wiring
Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing
Configuring 4-wire Parameters
POTS
Configuring POTS Parameters
CEPT-E1
Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface
Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type
High Speed Data Services
Configuring the Default PPPoE Service
Configuring SCPC High Speed Service
Configuring MPDS High Speed Service
Configuring SBB High Speed Service
Ethernet
Configuring Ethernet Wiring
Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode
Configuring the Ethernet Port Address
Configuring the Ethernet Mask
23-15-30
6-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)
Category
Section
Networking Parameters for Ethernet 1 Configuring the Host Name
and Ethernet 2
Configuring the Access Concentrator Name
Configuring the SNMP Server
Configuring the SNMP Community String
Configuring the TFTP Server
Configuring the DHCP Client
Configuring the DHCP Server
Configuring Telnet Access
Configuring the Managed Range
Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses
Configuring the Access Point Name
Avionics
Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)
Configuring the Secondary IRS
Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed
Configuring GNSS Equipment
Configuring the ICAO Code Source
Satellite Service
Configuring the Forward ID
Configuring Satellite Information
Configuring GES Service Provider Information
Configuring the Frequency Table
Configuring LES Service Provider Information
Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode
Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One
Configuring the Service Type Priority
Antenna
Configuring the Antenna Type
Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle
Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle
Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle
Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss
Configuring the Diplexer
23-15-30
6-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)
Category
MCDU
Section
Configuring MCDU Wiring
Configuring the MCDU Input Speed
Configuring the MCDU Output Speed
Configuring the MCDU Controller Type
Configuring the MCDU Type
Configuring the MCDU Font Colour
Configuring Manual Dialing
Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection
Configuring the Address Book Categories
CMU
Configuring CMU Wiring
Configuring the CMU Input Speed
Configuring the CMU Output Speed
Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word
Configuring Hardcoded SAL
Terminal Operation
Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions
Configuring Transmit on Ground
Configuring Self-test in Air
Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air
Configuring MCDU PAST
Configuring Field Loadable Software
Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy
Configuring Logon Interrogation
Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam
Masking Position in Logs
Configuring HSD SAL
Passive Intermodulation (PIM)
Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle
Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle
Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1
Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2
Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1
Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2
Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio
Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold
Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold
You can use the MPU to configure the user parameters described in Table 6-2:
23-15-30
6-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table 6-2 User ORT Parameters
Category
User Parameters
User ORT Parameter
Configuring the ORT Part Number (user)
Configuring the Service Type Priority
Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy
Configuring Logon Interrogation
Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam
Masking Position in Logs
A. Connecting to the MPU
You can configure ORT parameters manually or using the EMS ORT Application through
the HSD-440 terminal MPU.
To connect to the MPU:
1. Connect your computer to the maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
with a maintenance cable.
2. Start a terminal emulator session with the following parameters:
•
Baud rate—19200
•
No. of bits—8
•
Parity—None
•
Stop bits—1
•
Flow control—None
3. When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots, type the password maint.
NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen.
NOTE: You can configure secure and user ORT parameters using
maintenance-level access. The user-level access password, user, allows
you to see all the ORT parameters but you can only configure the user-level
parameters.
Menu 1 of the MPU appears. You can navigate the menus to configure ORT
parameters.
4. To navigate to Menu 3, press CTRL + N.
5. In Menu 3, type the number next to set CP ORT parameter, and then press ENTER.
A list of ORT parameters appears.
B. Configuring the ORT Part Number
You can configure a part number for the secure and user ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal displays the part number when it boots up.
23-15-30
6-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
When you configure the parameter for the part number, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
calculates a CRC value for the overall ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the
CRC value to indicate when the ORT has changed.
To configure the secure ORT part number or the user ORT part number:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECURE ORT P/N
parameter, or the USER ORT P/N parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the SECURE ORT P/N or the USER ORT P/N prompt, type in the part number,
and then press ENTER.
You can type up to 20 characters. The default is blank.
C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters
(1) Configuring the Call Signaling Mode
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can announce an incoming call in the aircraft cabin
with a chime and light of ARINC 741—the default setting, or with the CD1/CD2
discretes. The call signaling parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the call signaling mode:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT CALL
SIGNALING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To use chime and light signaling, type 0, or to use CD1/CD2 discrete signaling,
type 1, and then press ENTER.
The default is CHIME/LIGHT.
(2) Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can signal an outgoing call with a chime and a flashing
light. The outgoing call signaling parameter enables and disables these signals. This
parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure outgoing call signaling:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING
CALL SIGNALING parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To announce outgoing air to ground calls with a chime and light, type 1, or to
disable the chime and light, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(3) Configuring Ground Public Routing
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route public calls from the ground to the cockpit,
to the CEPT-E1 interface, or not route the call (disallowed). The ground public routing
preference parameter is in the secure ORT.
23-15-30
6-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure ground public routing preferences:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND PUBLIC
ROUTING PREFERENCE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To disallow all incoming public calls, type 1, or to route public calls to the cockpit,
type 2, or to route public calls to the CEPT-E1, type 3, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISALLOWED.
D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters
(1) Configuring 4-wire Wiring
The 4-wire #2 wired ORT parameter defines whether the second 4-wire equipment
is installed. The 4-wire #2 wired parameter is in the secure ORT.
NOTE: If the '4-WIRE #2 WIRED' ORT parameter is set to NO then the GROUND TO
COCKPIT ROUTING PREF parameter is automatically set to 4-WIRE #1.
To configure 4-wire #2 wiring:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-Wire #2 Wired
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the preference to NO, type 0, or to set the preference to YES, type 1, and
then press ENTER.
The default is NO.
(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route calls from the ground to the cockpit through
either of the two supported 4-wire phones. The call routing parameter is in the secure
ORT.
To configure ground-to-cockpit call routing:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND TO
COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREF parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To route the calls to 4-WIRE #1, type 1, or to route the calls to 4-WIRE #2 (if
wired) type 2, and then press ENTER.
The default is 4-WIRE #1.
(3) Configuring 4-wire Parameters
You can configure the noise, speaker, microphone, and sidetone level settings of the
4-wire phones. These 4-wire parameters are in the user ORT.
NOTE: To configure the 4-wire #2 parameters, repeat the following four procedures.
23-15-30
6-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure the 4-wire noise level:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 NOISE
LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 comfort noise insertion
level by typing one of the following values: 0, -40, -50, or -60, and then press
ENTER.
The default level is -50.
To configure the 4-wire speaker level:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER
LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, define the 4-wire #1 speaker volume, by typing a value between
0 and 100, and then press ENTER.
The default level is 50, which equals a 2.5 mW output.
To configure the 4-wire microphone level:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type in a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.
The default level is 70.
To configure the 4-wire sidetone level:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE
LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 sidetone level by typing
a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.
The default level is 50.
E. Configuring POTS Parameters
(1) Configuring POTS
You can enable and disable POTS with the POTS service parameter. The POTS
service parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure POTS:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the POTS SERVICE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable POTS, type 1, or to disable POTS, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
F.
Configuring CEPT-E1 Parameters
You can enable the CEPT-E1 interface with the MPU.
23-15-30
6-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface
The CEPT-E1 wiring parameter indicates whether the CEPT-E1 interface is wired.
The CEPT-E1 wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure CEPT-E1 wiring:
1. In the list of ORT interface parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1
WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To indicate the CEPT-E1 interface is wired, type 1, or to indicate the CEPT-E1
interface is not wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is YES.
(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type
The CEPT-E1 interface can connect to a variety of equipment. The available options
are:
•
Not installed
•
ARINC 746
•
ITU
The CEPT-E1 interface type parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the CEPT-E1 interface type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1 INTERFACE
TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To indicate that the CEPT-E1 interface type is not installed, type 0, or to indicate
the CEPT-E1 interface type is ARINC 746, type 1, or to indicate the CEPT-E1
interface type is ITU, type 2, and then press ENTER.
The default is ARINC 746.
G. Configuring High Speed Data Services
(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE Service
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can use a default PPPoE service name if the client
does not provide the service name. The default PPPoE service parameter is in the
secure ORT.
To configure the default PPPoE service:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the DEFAULT PPPOE
SERVICE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a default service name, up to 60-characters in length, and then press
ENTER.
The default PPPoE service name is PacketData.
(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed Service
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 SCPC service through
Ethernet. The parameter to allow SCPC sessions is in the secure ORT.
23-15-30
6-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure SCPC high speed service:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW SCPC
SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable SCPC services, type 1, or to disable SCPC services, type 0, and then
press ENTER.
The default is YES.
(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed Service
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 MPDS service through
Ethernet. The parameter to allow MPDS sessions is in the secure ORT.
To configure MPDS high speed service:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MPDS
SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable MPDS high speed service, type 1, or to disable MPDS high speed
service, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is YES.
(4) Configuring SBB High Speed Service
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to SBB service through Ethernet.
The parameter to allow SBB sessions is in the secure ORT.
To configure SBB high speed service:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW BGAN
SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable SBB high speed service, type 1, or to disable SBB high speed service,
type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is YES.
H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters
(1) Configuring Ethernet Wiring
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the parameters for Ethernet #1 and #2 wiring
in conjunction with the Ethernet link status to determine whether to raise and transmit
Ethernet faults to the CMU. If the Ethernet wiring parameters are set to NO, the
parameters for the Ethernet address and Ethernet mask have no effect.
The Ethernet wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure Ethernet wiring:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET #1 WIRED
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To specify that a device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 1, or to specify that
no device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is YES, wired.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure the ETHERNET #2 WIRED parameter.
23-15-30
6-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode
You can define the duplex mode for the Ethernet ports. The available options are:
•
ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex
•
ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex
•
ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=FULL Duplex
•
ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=FULL Duplex
The parameter for the Ethernet duplex mode is in the secure ORT.
To configure Ethernet duplex mode:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET DUPLEX
MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3, and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—half duplex for both ports
•
1—full duplex mode for Ethernet 1 only
•
2—full duplex mode for Ethernet 2 only
•
3—full duplex mode for both Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2
The default is 0.
A message similar to the following appears:
PROCEEDING TO STORE DATA
(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port Address
You can configure the base IP address for each of the two Ethernet ports. The
parameters that define the Ethernet port addresses are in the secure ORT.
To configure the Ethernet port addresses:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1
ADDRESS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.
The default address for Ethernet 1 is 192.168.0.1. The default address for
Ethernet 2 is 0.0.0.0.
(4) Configuring the Ethernet Mask
You can configure the network mask for each of the two Ethernet ports. The
parameters that define the Ethernet port network masks are in the secure ORT.
To configure the Ethernet port masks:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1 MASK
parameter.
2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.
The default subnet mask for both Ethernet ports is 255.255.255.0.
23-15-30
6-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
I.
Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2
(1) Configuring the Host Name
You can configure the host name for the HSD-440 terminal with a string of up to 20
characters. The parameter for the host name is in the secure ORT.
To configure the host name:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HOST NAME
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type the host name for the HSD-440 terminal using a maximum
of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.
The default is DataIO.
(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator Name
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the access concentrator name parameter to
differentiate between PPPoE devices. The access concentrator name can include
up to 20 characters. The access concentrator name parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the access concentrator name:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS
CONCENTRATOR NAME parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type a name of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.
A message indicating that the DATA I/O parameter block is updated appears.
The default is DataIO.
(3) Configuring the SNMP Server
The SNMP server parameter enables and disables the SNMP server. This parameter
is in the secure ORT.
To enable the SNMP server:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP SERVER
parameter, and the press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type the number next to the enabled or disabled option, and then
press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
(4) Configuring the SNMP Community String
You can define an SNMP community string with up to 32 characters. This parameter
is in the secure ORT.
To configure the SNMP community string:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP COMMUNITY
STRING parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type a name up to 32 characters in length, and then press ENTER.
The default is PUBLIC.
23-15-30
6-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(5) Configuring the TFTP Server
You can enable and disable the TFTP server. The TFTP server parameter is in the
secure ORT.
To configure the TFTP server:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TFTP SERVER
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the TFTP server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the TFTP server,
type no, and then press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
(6) Configuring the DHCP Client
You can enable and disable the DHCP client on Ethernet port one. The DHCP client
parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the DHCP client:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP
CLIENT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the DHCP client, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the DHCP
client, type no, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(7) Configuring the DHCP Server
You can enable and disable the DHCP server on Ethernet port one. The DHCP server
parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the DHCP server:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP
SERVER parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the DHCP server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the DHCP
server, type no, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(8) Configuring Telnet Access
You can enable and disable the Telnet server. The Telnet server parameter is in the
secure ORT.
To configure Telnet access:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TELNET ACCESS
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the Telnet server, at the prompt, type yes, or to disable the Telnet
server, type no, and then press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
(9) Configuring the Managed Range
You can configure the starting IP address provided to DHCP clients if the DHCP
server is enabled. The managed range parameter is in the secure ORT.
23-15-30
6-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure the managed range:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the START OF MANAGED
RANGE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type the starting address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then
press ENTER.
The default is 192.168.0.100.
(10)Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses
You can configure the number of managed addresses provided to DHCP clients if
the DHCP server is enabled. The parameter for the number of managed addresses
is in the secure ORT.
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the NUMBER OF
MANAGED ADDRESSES parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.
The default value is 50.
(11) Configuring the Access Point Name
When configuring SBB services, you can configure the access point name in the
secure ORT.
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS POINT
NAME parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type a name, and the press ENTER. An example name is
stratos.bgan.inmarsat.com.
The default value is null.
J. Configuring Avionics Parameters
(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)
You can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the primary IRS (IRS
#1). The available options are:
•
Inertial—default
•
GNSS
•
Hybrid
The primary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the primary IRS type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PRIMARY IRS TYPE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—INERTIAL (default)
•
1—GNSS
•
2—HYBRID
23-15-30
6-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(2) Configuring the Secondary IRS
You can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the secondary IRS
(IRS #2). The available options are:
•
Not installed—default
•
Inertial
•
AES ID
•
GNSS
•
Hybrid
The secondary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the secondary IRS type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS
TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—NOT INSTALLED (default)
•
1—INERTIAL
•
2—AES ID
•
3—GNSS
•
4—HYBRID
The default is Not Installed.
(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed
You can set the receive data rate for the secondary IRS ARINC 429 bus. This
parameter is in the secure ORT.
To set the secondary IRS input speed:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS
INPUT SPEED SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the IRS ARINC 429 bus data receive speed rate to high rate, type 1, or
to set the bus speed to low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default speed is high rate.
(4) Configuring GNSS Equipment
You can enable and disable the GPS protection algorithm depending on the
GPS/GLONASS equipment installed in the aircraft. The available options are:
•
None
•
GPS—default
•
GPS Augmented by GLONASS
The parameter for GNSS equipment is in the secure ORT.
23-15-30
6-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure GNSS equipment:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the A/C GNSS
EQUIPMENT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—disables GPS protection on an aircraft that does not have GPS
augmented by GLONASS navigation equipment installed
•
1—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS navigation
equipment installed
•
2—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS augmented by
GLONASS navigation equipment installed
The default is GPS.
(5) Configuring the ICAO Code Source
You can provide the ICAO code by strapping or from the ARINC 429 source. You
can use the ARINC 429 source only if the Secondary IRS Type parameter is set to
AES ID.
The ICAO code source parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the ICAO code source:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ICAO CODE SOURCE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To configure A429 SOURCE as the source, type 1, or to configure STRAP inertial
as the source, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is STRAP.
K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters
(1) Configuring the Forward ID
You can configure the six-digit hexadecimal Forward ID required for Swift 64 services.
The Forward ID is in the secure ORT.
To configure the Forward ID:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FORWARD ID
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To define the forward ID, type the forward ID, then press ENTER.
The default forward ID is 000000—this forward ID does not allow access to the
satellite network.
NOTE: Power cycle the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate the new Forward
ID.
23-15-30
6-15
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(2) Configuring Satellite Information
You can configure the name, location, and service available from up to eight
satellites. This does not allow access to the satellite network. Satellite information is
in the secure ORT. The default settings are:
Entry #
Region
Satellite Name and
Longitude
AORW (W) 53.0W
CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT64
AORE (E) 15.5W
CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT64
POR (P), 178.0E
CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT64
IOR (I) 64.0E
CLASSIC AERO, SWIFT64
MTSAT (4) 142.5E
CLASSIC AERO
APAC (5), 144 E
CLASSIC AERO, BGAN
EMEA (6), 25.0E
CLASSIC AERO, BGAN
AMERICAS (7) 98.0 W
CLASSIC AERO, BGAN
Services
To configure satellite information:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SATELLITE NAMES
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type the number of the ENTRY you want to modify, and then press ENTER.
A prompt appears. For example:
EDITING ENTRY #1 REGION 0:
NAME [AORW] ?
3. At the NAME prompt, type the satellite name and then press ENTER.
4. At the ABBREVIATION prompt, type an abbreviation for the satellite name and
then press ENTER.
5. At the LONGITUDE prompt, type the longitude and then press ENTER.
6. At the SATELLITE SERVICES prompt, identify the service and then press
ENTER. You can specify one or more of the following:
•
Type A for AERO
•
Type S for SWIFT64
•
Type B for SBB
NOTE: To specify more than one service, for example, classic AERO and Swift
64, type AS.
7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
23-15-30
6-16
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(3) Configuring GES Service Provider Information
You can configure the GES Name, satellite ID, GES ID, and priority for up to 33
GESs. GES information is in the secure ORT. Note the GES ID in the following table
is an Octal number. The default settings are:
GES Name
Satellite ID
GES ID
Priority
Aussaguel
05
Eik
02
Aussaguel
103
Eik
104
Perth
205
Santa Paula
202
Perth
305
Eik
301
Hawaii
120
Fucino
220
Hawaii
320
To configure GES service provider information:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GES SERVICE
PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
A prompt appears. For example:
OTHER ENTRIES ARE EMPTY -- ENTER NUMBER OF ENTRY TO
EDIT (1,33) ?
2. At the ENTRY prompt, type the entry number to add or edit and then press
ENTER.
3. At the SATELLITE prompt, type the number of the satellite ID and then press
ENTER.
4. At the GES [octal]? prompt, type the number (in Octal) of the GES ID and then
press ENTER.
5. At the PRIORITY prompt, type a number between 1 and 10 and then press
ENTER.
6. At the GES NAME prompt, type in the GES name and then press ENTER.
7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
23-15-30
6-17
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(4) Configuring the Frequency Table
The Frequency Table defines the Global Band (SBB) and PSID (Areo H/H+)
frequencies for up to eight satellites. You can configure two or more frequency pairs
and NCS (S64) for each service type. The Frequency Table is in the secure ORT.
The default settings are:
Entry #
Region
Service Type Frequencies
Frequencies
AERO PSID FREQS: $3702, $36B8
NCS FREQS: $2AAC,$30E0
AERO PSID0 FREQS: $36FE, $36B6
NCS FREQS: $2AB0,$30E4
AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4, $3700
AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2, $36FC
AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7, $38F7
Global Beam FREQS: $2AF2, $302A
AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA, $36DA
Global Beam FREQS: $2BA0, $309E
AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE, $36DE
Global Beam FREQS:$2A4C, $3004
AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$36DC
To configure the Frequency Table:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FREQUENCY TABLE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER.
3. At the SBB GLOBAL BEAM FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then
press ENTER.
4. At the AERO PSID FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press
ENTER.
5. At the SWIFT64 NCS FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press
ENTER.
6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
NOTE: You must enter a minimum of two frequency pairs per service type for each
satellite up to a maximum of eight satellites. Frequency pairs are
hexadecimal, with values separated by a comma, for example,
$3702, $36B8.
23-15-30
6-18
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(5) Configuring LES Service Provider Information
The LES Service Provider Table can hold LES parameters for up to eight satellites.
The LES parameters are the satellite name and LES ID. The LES service provider
information is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:
Entry #
Satellite
LES ID
AORW
LES 0
AORE
LES 0
POR
LES 0
IOR
LES 0
MTSAT
LES 0
APAC
LES 0
EMEA
LES 0
AMERICAS
LES 0
To configure LES service provider information:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LES SERVICE
PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER.
3. At the LES prompt, type the LES number and then press ENTER.
4. At the NETWORK ID prompt, type the network ID and then press ENTER.
5. At the LES NAME prompt, type the LES name and then press ENTER.
6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y, or to cancel, type N.
(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode
The SBB timing mode determines the timing precision used by the Radio Access
Network. The timing modes are: GPS Assisted, Not Assisted, and Auto
Determination. The default setting is Not Assisted. The SBB timing mode is in the
secure ORT.
To configure the SBB timing mode:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SWIFTBROADBAND
TIMING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, or 2, and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—Not Assisted—default
•
1—GPS Assisted
•
2—Auto Determination
The auto determination state uses a lookup of the primary IRS type and
secondary IRS type ORT parameters. If either specifies GNSS, or HYBRID type
labels, the SwiftBroadband timing mode is GPS assisted. If GNSS, or HYBRID
23-15-30
6-19
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
is not specified, is not assisted. If the timing mode is not assisted, the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal is set as Aeronautical Class without GPS BGAN terminal.
(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One
Channel card one can access SBB and Swift 64 services. You can assign the priority
service with the following options:
•
SWIFT64 ONLY
•
SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64—default
•
SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY
•
SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6
The priority service is in the secure ORT.
To configure the priority service for channel card one:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CARD #1 SBB/S64
PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3 and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—SWIFT64 only on CC1
•
1—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64
•
2—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY
•
3—SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6
The default priority service is SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO
SWIFT64.
(8) Configuring the Service Type Priority
The service type priority parameter defines which service gets second priority for
power when the requirements for priority three and above Aero H calls are satisfied.
The service type priority parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the service type priority:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SERVICE TYPE
PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To configure PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE, type 0, or to configure SBB/S64,
type 1, and then press ENTER.
The default is PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE.
L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters
(1) Configuring the Antenna Type
The antenna type parameter defines the type of antenna installed on the aircraft. The
available options are:
•
ARINC 781 HGA
•
ARINC 781 IGA
•
ARINC 741 HGA, Top Mount—default
23-15-30
6-20
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
ARINC 741 HGA, Side Mount
If a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal cannot use the side-mount
antenna.
The antenna type parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the antenna type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA TYPE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 2, 4, or 5 and then press ENTER, where:
•
2—ARINC 781 HGA
•
4—ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT
•
5—ARINC 741 HGA, SIDE MOUNT
The default is set to ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT.
(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle
The antenna mounting rotation angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis
of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The rotation is
measured counter-clockwise from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna
forward axis (or the port side).
The antenna mounting rotation angle parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the antenna mounting rotation angle:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA
MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.
The default is 0.0.
(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle
The antenna mounting pitch angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis
of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The pitch is
measured in the nose-up direction from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna
forward axis.
The antenna mounting pitch angle parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the antenna mounting pitch angle:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA
MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.
The default is 0.0.
(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle
The antenna mounting roll angle defines the difference between the port-starboard
axis of the antenna reference plane and the port-starboard axis of the aircraft. The
roll is measured in the starboard-up direction from the aircraft starboard axis toward
the antenna starboard axis.
23-15-30
6-21
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The antenna mounting roll angle parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the antenna mounting roll angle:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA
MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.
The default is 0.0.
(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss
The HPA to antenna loss parameter defines the total loss (in dB) from the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal to the antenna input port, including the DLNA and DLNA to antenna
cable losses. The HPA to antenna loss parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the HPA to antenna loss:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD (HPA)ANTENNA LOSS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a value between 0 and 5.0, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.
The default is 2.5.
(6) Configuring the Diplexer
You can configure the type of diplexer installed in the aircraft. The available options
are:
•
Type A
•
Type A Modified
•
Type D
•
Type F—default
Type F diplexers support SBB service.
The diplexer parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the diplexer:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the INSTALLED
DIPLEXER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 0, 1, 2, or 3 and then press ENTER, where:
•
0—diplexer TYPE A
•
1—diplexer TYPE A MODIFIED
•
2—diplexer TYPE D
•
3—diplexer TYPE F
The default is TYPE A.
23-15-30
6-22
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters
(1) Configuring MCDU Wiring
The MCDU wiring parameter defines whether the MCDU can be wired or not wired.
There is a parameter for each of the devices. The MCDU wired parameters are in
the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the MCDU interface on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI #x
WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.
The prompt: MCDU/WSCI #x WIRED where x equals 1 appears.
2. To indicate that the MCDU #1 device is wired, type 1, or to indicate that it is not
wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default for the MCDU/WSCI #1 WIRED parameter is Yes.
(2) Configuring the MCDU Input Speed
You can configure the input bus speed to high or low. The input speed parameter is
in the secure ORT.
To configure MCDU input speed:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI INPUT
SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the input bus data speed to high rate, type 1, or to set the bus speed to
low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default speed is low rate.
(3) Configuring the MCDU Output Speed
You can configure the output bus speed to high or low. The output speed parameter
is in the secure ORT.
To configure MCDU output speed:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI OUTPUT
SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the output bus speed to high rate, type 1, or to set the output bus speed
to low, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default output speed is set to high rate.
(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller Type
You can select the type of controller installed on the aircraft. The controller type
parameter is in the secure ORT.
To configure the MCDU controller type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI
CONTROLLER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To select the controller type MCDU, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is MCDU.
23-15-30
6-23
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(5) Configuring the MCDU Type
You can select the type of MCDU installed in the aircraft. The MCDU type parameter
is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the MCDU type:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU TYPE
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. At the prompt, type 1, 2, 3, or 6 and then press ENTER, where:
•
1—UNILINK
•
2—SMITHS
•
3—HONEYWELL
•
6—BOEING TECHSAT SIM
The default is UNILINK.
(6) Configuring the MCDU Font Colour
You can change the color of text on the MCDU screen. The MCDU font colour
parameter enables the MCDU to display colours other than white. The MCDU FONT
COLOUR is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the MCDU font colour:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU FONT
COLOUR parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the MCDU font colour, type 1, or to disable the MCDU font colour, type
0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(7) Configuring Manual Dialing
You can manually dial numbers using the MCDU keyboard. The manual dialing can
be enabled or disabled. The ALLOW MANUAL DIAL parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
To configure manual dialing:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MANUAL
DIAL parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable manual dialing, type 1, or to disable manual dialing, type 0, and then
press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection
The COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT parameter enables users to
pre-select air-to-ground calls and then dial the number using the Mic-On input or
MAKE CALL button on the MCDU. When this parameter is disabled, the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal dials air-to-ground calls immediately.
23-15-30
6-24
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure outgoing call pre-selection:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING
CALL PRE-SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable pre-selection, type 1, or to disable pre-selection, type 0, and then press
ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(9) Configuring the Address Book Categories
The address book defines a table that can hold up to 400 telephone numbers in 4
categories of up to 100 entries. Each entry includes:
•
A phone number (maximum of 18 digits).
•
A name (maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters).
•
A priority for the phone number. The priority can be EMG, OP-HI, OP-LO, and
NON-OP, which correspond to priority (Q) numbers 15, 12, 10, and 9.
•
A parameter to indicate whether the entry can be edited via the MCDU.
•
A parameter to indicate the phone book category to which the entry belongs.
You can define up to four phone book categories in the MCDU address book. The
category name can be up to ten characters in length. The category name parameters
are in the secure partition of the ORT.
NOTE: If the ORT entry is empty, CATEGORY #x appears, where x is the number
of the phone book category, between 1 and 4.
To configure the address book categories:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT
NAME 1 parameter.
2. Type the category name and then press ENTER.
3. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT
NAME 2 parameter.
4. Type the category name and then press ENTER.
5. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT
NAME 3 parameter.
6. Type the category name and then press ENTER.
7. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT
NAME 4 parameter.
N. Configuring the CMU
(1) Configuring CMU Wiring
You can configure if either of the two available CMUs is wired. The CMU #x WIRED
parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
23-15-30
6-25
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure the CMU wiring:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU #x WIRED
parameter, and then press ENTER.
The prompt: CMU #x WIRED? where x equals 1 or 2 appears.
2. To indicate that the CMU #1 or CMU #2 can be wired, type 1, or to indicate that
the CMU #1 or CMU #2 cannot be wired, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default for the CMU #1 WIRED parameter is YES (wired) and for the CMU
#2 WIRED parameter is NO (not wired).
(2) Configuring the CMU Input Speed
You can configure the input bus speed to high rate or low rate. The input speed
parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure CMU input speed:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU INPUT SPEED
SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the CMU input bus speed to a high rate, type 1, or to set the CMU input
bus speed to a low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is low rate.
(3) Configuring the CMU Output Speed
You can configure the output bus speed to high rate or low rate. The output speed
parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure CMU output speed:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU OUTPUT SPEED
SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To set the CMU output bus speed to a high rate, type 1, or to set the CMU output
bus speed to a low rate, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is low rate.
(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send join/leave words periodically or only on
logon and logoff events. The CMU-SDU join/leave word parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
NOTE: This parameter supports Universal brand CMU that reports a SAL that is
different than the one it accepts when using a Williamsburg protocol.
To configure the CMU-SDU join/leave word:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU
JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To transmit join/leave words periodically, type 1, or to transmit join/leave words
on events, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is PERIODIC.
23-15-30
6-26
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(5) Configuring Hardcoded SAL
The CMU-SDU hardcoded SAL parameter determines the SAL used in SDU to CMU
Williamsburg messages. If this parameter is set to YES, a SAL of 304 is used
regardless of the SAL reported to the CMU. If this parameter is set to NO, the SDU
uses the SAL reported by the CMU. If a SAL is not present on the bus after one
minute, the CMU uses a SAL of 304.The CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL parameter
is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the hardcoded SAL:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU HARD
CODED SAL parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable hardcoded SAL, type 1, or to disable hardcoded SAL, type 0, and then
press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
O. Configuring Terminal Operation
(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions
Restrictions to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation are based on whether the
terminal is on the ground or in the air. This parameter enables or disables those
restrictions. The parameter for air/ground status restrictions is in the secure partition
of the ORT.
When the air/ground status restriction parameter is enabled, the parameters for
self-test in air and transmit on ground behave normally. If the air/ground status
restriction parameter is disabled, the parameters for self-test in air and transmit on
ground act as if they are enabled.
To configure air/ground status restrictions:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the AIR/GROUND
STATUS RESTRICTIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the air/ground status restrictions, type 1, or to disable the air/ground
status restrictions, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(2) Configuring Transmit on Ground
You can restrict the ability of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to transmit on the ground.
The parameter for transmitting on the ground is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure transmit on ground:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TRANSMIT ON
GROUND parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground, type 1, or to
disable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground type 0, and then
press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
23-15-30
6-27
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(3) Configuring Self-test in Air
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s MCDU or MPU can request a power-on self-test.
The ORT parameter Self-test in Air determines if the self-test is permitted or not when
the aircraft is in the air. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure self-test in air:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SELF-TEST IN AIR
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the self-test in air type 1, or to disable the self-test in air, type 0, and
then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air
You can reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using the MPU if you are logged into
the MPU at the MENU or USER level. The Maintenance Command Execution in Air
determines if the reset is permitted or not when the aircraft is in the air. The MAINT
CMD EXECUTION IN AIR parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure maintenance command execution in air:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MAINT CMD
EXECUTION IN AIR parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable maintenance commands in the air, type 1, or to disable this feature,
type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(5) Configuring MCDU PAST
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can perform a power-on self-test according to a
command from an MCDU. You can enable and disable this function with the MCDU
PAST parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure MCDU PAST:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU PAST
parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the MCDU PAST, type 1, or to disable the MCDU PAST, type 0, and
then press ENTER.
The default is ENABLED.
(6) Configuring Field Loadable Software
The HSD-440 terminal can accept file transfers from user equipment connected to
Ethernet port one. You can enable and disable this function with the field loadable
software parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.
23-15-30
6-28
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure field loadable software:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SW FIELD
LOADABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable the file transfers, type 1, or to disable the file transfers, type 0, and
then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy
The logon/handover policy determines if the equipment automatically logs on, or
waits to log on, or changes satellite when the instruction is received from the pilot.
The policy options are automatic and manual. The default policy is automatic. The
logon/handover policy parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.
To configure the logon/handover policy:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LOG-ON/HANDOVER
POLICY parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To select automatic logon, type 1, or to select manual logon, type 0, and then
press ENTER.
The default is AUTOMATIC.
(8) Configuring Logon Interrogation
The response to logon interrogation enables the AES to be interrogated. The logon
interrogation parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.
To enable the logon interrogation:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the RESPONSE TO
LOG-ON INTERROGATION parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable interrogation, type 1, or to disable interrogation, type 0, and then press
ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam
The High-rate R/T in global beam parameter enables or disables high-rate in Global
Beam. The high-rate R/T is in the user partition of the ORT.
To enable or disable high-rate R/T:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HIGH RATE R/T IN
GLOBAL BEAM parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable high-rate in Global Beam, type 1, or to disable high-rate in Global
Beam, type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(10)Masking Position in Logs
The HSD-440 terminal can record the position of the aircraft in the HSD-440 terminal
logs. You can enable and disable the recording of position information with the mask
position in logs parameter. This parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.
23-15-30
6-29
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
NOTE: This is the first of several checks that are performed before field software
can be loaded.
To mask position in logs:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MASK POSITION IN
LOGS parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. To enable position masking in logs, type 1, or to disable position masking in logs,
type 0, and then press ENTER.
The default is DISABLED.
(11) Configuring HSD SAL
This parameter defines the SAL the terminal uses. This parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
To configure the HSD SAL:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD SAL parameter,
and then press ENTER.
2. Type a three-digit hex value, and then press ENTER.
The default is 307.
P. Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Parameters
Inmarsat requires terminals to perform PIM tests before using SBB services. Section 5:
"Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16 provides instructions for performing
the PIM test. This section describes ORT parameters related to the PIM test.
(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle
This parameter defines the azimuth point angle for PIMBIT offset from true north or
true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter
is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA
AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 15.0.
(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle
This parameter defines the azimuth point angle for the PIM test offset from true north
or true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter
is in the secure partition of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA AZIMUTH
OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 11.0.
23-15-30
6-30
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1
This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the
terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition
of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angl1e:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA
ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 12.5.
(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2
This parameter defines the second elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when
the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA
ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 18.0.
(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1
This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the
terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA
ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 12.5.
(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2
This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the
terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure
partition of the ORT.
To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA
ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 27.5.
(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio
This parameter defines the number of computed samples to discard from the PIM
test calculations.
23-15-30
6-31
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To configure the PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT
MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 5.0.
(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold
This parameter defines the failure threshold level for the PIM test in dBs of channel
degradation.
To configure the PIMBIT Failure Threshold:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT FAILURE
THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 3.0.
(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold
This parameter defines the antenna beam pointing fail threshold for the PIM test.
To configure the PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold:
1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT POINTING
FAILURE THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a positive whole number, and then press ENTER.
The default is 1.
2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application
The ORT application provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for creating and saving ORT
configuration files, modifying ORT parameters, and loading ORT configurations into the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Using the ORT application, you can modify all of the same parameters (secure and user) that
are available through the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, as described in "Configuring ORT
Parameters Using the MPU" on page 6-1. After you modify ORT parameters, you must export
the changed configuration before loading it into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
This section provides information and instructions on how to use the ORT application, including:
•
Creating an ORT Configuration
•
Opening a Saved ORT Configuration
•
Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration
•
Exporting an ORT File
•
Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
23-15-30
6-32
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Searching for an ORT Parameter
A. Creating an ORT Configuration
Creating an ORT configuration includes:
•
Opening the ORT file template
•
Editing parameters
•
Saving the ORT configuration
To open an ORT configuration template:
1. Double-click on the ortedit.exe file.
The EMS ORT Application opens.
2. Click File, and then click Open Package.
The Choose ORT Package dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the HSD440.ort file and click Open.
The default ORT parameters appear in the EMS ORT Application window.
23-15-30
6-33
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The EMS ORT Application organizes ORT parameters into functional groups. You can
access each group by clicking on its tab at the top of the window. A lock symbol marks
groups of secure ORT parameters, and an open lock symbol marks the group of user
ORT parameters. Click the left and right arrows to see more tabs.
The functional groups of parameters are:
•
Part Number—the part number of the Secure ORT
•
Satellite Network
•
MCDU
•
CMC/CMU
•
IRS
•
Antenna
•
4-wire/POTS/CEPT-E1
•
Routing
•
Ethernet
•
System
•
User—all User parameters
23-15-30
6-34
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To edit ORT parameters:
1. Click on the tab for the functional group that contains the parameter you wish to
edit.
2. Click on a parameter name in the Name column, then click on the parameter
value in the Value column.
For parameters with text or numerical values, the cursor appears. For parameters
with preset options, a menu appears.
NOTE: Some parameters are expandable. Click on the plus sign to the left of
the parameter name to expand the parameter. Alternatively, right-click
on the parameter name and click Expand all.
3. Type or select the new value for the parameter.
NOTE: To reset a parameter to its default value, right-click on the parameter
and click Reset to default.
The ORT application can save an ORT configuration as an XML file. If you do not finish
editing all the ORT parameters in one session, you can save the ORT configuration file
and re-open it at a later time. The XML file is not uploaded to the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal, it can only be opened in the ORT application for parameter editing.
To save an ORT configuration file:
1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Save As.
The Save As dialog box opens.
2. In the File name field, type a name for the new ORT configuration, and then click
Save.
The new ORT configuration is saved as an XML file.
B. Opening a Saved ORT Configuration
The EMS ORT Application saves ORT configurations as XML files. You can open these
XML files in the EMS ORT Application.
To open a saved ORT configuration:
1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Open.
The Select a file dialog box appears.
2. Click on a saved ORT configuration and then click Open.
The saved ORT configuration appears in the EMS ORT Application window.
C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration
The EMS ORT Application can import data into its Address book parameter. The data in
the Address book parameter includes:
•
Name—the name displayed to identify the address book entry
•
Number—the phone number
•
Priority—the priority setting for calls to this number
•
MCDU Editable—enables and disables changes to this entry from the MCDU
23-15-30
6-35
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The ORT Address book parameter includes four categories with 100 entries in each
category. You can create and import a separate file for each category.
The EMS ORT Application creates address book entries from imported Comma
Separated Value (CSV) files that have the .csv file extension. You can create .csv files
with Microsoft® Excel®.
Importing a phone book includes:
•
Creating a .csv file
•
Importing the .csv file into the EMS ORT Application
To create a .csv file:
1. Open Microsoft Excel.
2. Type the following into the specified cells, as shown below:
•
cell A1—addressBook/addressBookCategory[1]
•
The EMS ORT Application adds the entries in this file into Category 1 of
the Address book.
•
To create categories two, three, and four, change the category number
inside the square brackets. You need to create a separate .csv file for
each category.
•
cell A2—abeName
•
cell B2—abeNumber
•
cell C2—abePriority
•
cell D2—abeMCDUEditable
3. For each entry you want to add to the address book, type data in the columns
abeName, abeNumber, abePriority, and abeMCDUEditable. Each row
represents one address book entry:
•
In column abeName, type the name of the address book entry. The maximum
length of the name is 14 alphanumeric characters.
•
In column abeNumber, type the phone number without hyphens or spaces.
The maximum length of the phone number is 18 digits.
•
In the column abePriority, type the priority of this entry. Priority may be one
of OP-HI, OP-LO, NON-OP, or EMG.
•
In the abeMDCUEditable column, type YES or NO to indicate if this entry is
editable from the MCDU.
23-15-30
6-36
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
4. Save the spreadsheet as a .csv file.
To import a .csv file:
1. Open the EMS ORT Application.
2. Open an ORT file or create a new file—refer to “Creating an ORT Configuration”
on page 6-33 and “Opening a Saved ORT Configuration” on page 6-35.
3. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Import Phonebook.
The Choose CSV File dialog box appears.
4. Click on the CSV file and then click Open.
The Import Phonebook message confirms the number of entries imported from
the CSV file, and the EMS ORT Application adds the entries to the ORT
configuration.
D. Exporting an ORT File
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal control processor uses a special file type that you can
export from the EMS ORT Application. When you export a file, the EMS ORT Application
creates two files—one for the control processor and one text (.txt) file for your reference.
To export an ORT file:
1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File, and then click Export.
The Choose Output File dialog box appears.
2. Type a new file name (no extension) in the File name box and then click Save.
The ORT configuration is exported (two files are created) and the Export
Document dialog box appears.
3. Click OK.
E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
You can load an exported ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the
Ethernet connection.
To load the ORT file you’ll need:
•
A computer with the tftp application
An ethernet cable
•
A serial cable—see section b: "Maintenance Port Cable Assembly" on page 4-37.
•
The IP address of the terminal’s Ethernet 1 port
23-15-30
6-37
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
To load an ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal:
1. Connect a computer to an Ethernet port and the Maintenance Port on the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
2. Copy the ORT file to the computer.
3. Start a HyperTerminal session to the Maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal.
Section c: "Interface Requirements" on page 4-38 provides the settings for this
connection.
4. To access the Maintenance Port Utility, type the password maint.
The password does not appear on the screen.
5. To navigate to Menu 2, press CTRL + N.
6. To allow tftp access to the terminal, in Menu 2, press l.
7. At the prompt, type the new password allowtftp.
A message confirms that tftp is allowed for ten minutes.
8. On your computer, click Start, and then click Run.
The Run dialog box appears.
9. In the Open field, type cmd.
The Command window appears.
10. Navigate to the directory that includes the new ORT file.
11. To load the ORT file, type tftp -i xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx put filename.
•
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address of the Ethernet 1 port.
•
filename represents the name of the new ORT file.
When the tftp application loaded the file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, a short
message confirms the number of bytes transferred.
12. To transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, in Menu 3, press r.
13. At the prompt to transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, type yesido.
The number of transferred bytes indicates the transfer progress.
The ORT file load is complete.
23-15-30
6-38
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM
COVERAGE
Inmarsat operates strategically placed geostationary satellites called I-3 and I-4. I-3 satellites
provide access to services such as Swift 64 and Aero H/H+, and I-4 satellites provide access to
SBB and Aero H/H+ services.
1. I-3 Satellites
Each I-3 satellite is located over and named after an OR. The four satellite ORs are:
•
Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)
•
Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)
•
Indian Ocean Region (IOR)
•
Pacific Ocean Region (POR)
Figure A-1 represents the ORs with approximate transfer coordinates for satellite transitions.
Figure A-1 ORs
23-15-30
A-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The four satellite ORs are made up of smaller, spot-beam coverage areas. The following maps
show the Inmarsat satellite spot-beam coverage for the four ORs, and a composite map of the
four regions combined.
NOTE: Figure A-2 and Figure A-3 depict Inmarsat's expectations of coverage but do not
represent a guarantee of service and should not be relied upon. The availability of
service at the edge of coverage areas fluctuates depending upon a variety of
conditions.
Figure A-2 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map
23-15-30
A-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Figure A-3 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps
23-15-30
A-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
2. I-4 Satellites
There are three I-4 satellites in service:
•
I-4 Americas (98W)
•
I-4 EMEA (25E)
•
I-4 Asia-Pacific (143.5E)
Figure A-4 shows the I-4 satellite coverage regions.
Figure A-4 Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map
23-15-30
A-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST
Before performing the detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual,
read the following Troubleshooting Checklist. Use the Troubleshooting Checklist to make sure
that you have not missed any key steps in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal setup.
1. Have you registered with a service provider to activate service?
You must activate an account with an Inmarsat-authorized service provider to access
the Satellite Communications network using an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Contact
Inmarsat for a list of available service providers at:
Inmarsat Customer Care
99 City Road, London, EC1Y 1AX
Tel: +44 20 7728 1777
Fax: +44 20 7728 1142
E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com
2. Has your account been activated?
Once registered, your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is assigned terminal identification
numbers called FWD IDs. If you have SBB service, service information also includes
IMSI. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be strapped accordingly. Refer to
"Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed strapping and installation instructions.
NOTE: The service registration information may take a few days to be incorporated
into the system databases at the LESGES level. New terminals being
commissioned are not validated by the LES/GES until their customer
database has been updated by Inmarsat to reflect the registration and
activation of your terminal.
NOTE: To verify that the service registration information has been validated at the
LES/GES, call 33 POUND KEY for assistance. Confirm with the LES/GES
operator that the FWD IDs assigned to your terminal are valid and active.
3. Is the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal seated properly?
In cases where the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not fully seated into the ARINC 600
connector (to the rear of the Fan Tray), the user may experience intermittent system
operation. If intermittent system operation occurs:
•
Check that the polarization pins are installed correctly as indicated on the
applicable Outline and Installation diagram.
•
Make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is fully inserted into the tray and
that the front hold-down screws are securely tightened.
23-15-30
B-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
4. Is all cabling attached correctly and securely?
Broken connections and improper cabling are the most common causes of HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal malfunctions. Before proceeding with testing and troubleshooting,
complete the following checks:
•
Check that all cables and wiring are routed and connected correctly and securely.
•
Make sure that the terminal is installed with the correct power source.
•
Verify that all external user and networking devices (for example: TAs, routers,
fax, telephones, computers) are connected and configured properly.
5. Have any changes to the system been made?
For previously installed and functional terminals, make note of any changes made
to the system since the last time the terminal functioned without problems.
•
Were any new devices or systems connected to the terminal?
•
Have any connecting devices or equipment been removed or replaced? If so,
check that all new or replaced connections are attached and configured correctly.
•
Have you changed service providers or re-configured the system in any way?
6. Are your Primary and Secondary LES/GES Access Codes programmed for all
ORs?
The system default for LES/GES access codes is set to 0 (zero), which must be
configured to valid LES/GES access codes before operation. Refer to "System
Operation" on page 2-1 for details.
7. Was the operational mode of the system strapped or configured correctly?
Verify that the system mode wiring straps match the installation configuration mode.
8. Are the SIM cards activated?
Activate report 69 and check that the OC column of the report shows ATCH (attached)
then dial a SBB call.
9. Is the APN set?
Verify that the APN is set.
1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility.
2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the
miscellaneous EEPROM settings.
3. To view or set the APN, type the number next to the APN and then press ENTER.
10. Are GES preferences correctly set?
To verify GES preferences:
1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility.
2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the Ocean
Region parameters.
23-15-30
B-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
3. To view GES preferences, type the number next to the GES preference, and
then press ENTER.
The GES priority table appears.
The eNfusion® HSD High-speed Data Terminal Developer’s Guide,
MN-1252-13005, provides more information about GES preferences.
23-15-30
B-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
B-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX C: RJ45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS
23-15-30
C-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
C-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX D: INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST
Installation Planning Steps
1. Register the terminal for services (if applicable)
Record the following information (provided by Honeywell upon purchase)
†
Inmarsat Serial Numbers (ISN) x
†
IMSI #1
Contact your Service Provider and provide the 12-digit ISNs from above
Record the FWD IDs received (from your Service Provider or from Inmarsat) and
corresponding Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN)
†
FWD IDs
(last 6 digits of ISN)
IMNs
ISDN Speech
ISDN
(3.1 kHz audio)
ISDN 56 kbps
ISDN 64 kbps
MPDS
Service Provider
†
AOR-W
†
AOR-E
†
IOR
†
POR
†
2. Register the terminal for SBB services (if applicable)
APN
†
Master MSISDN
†
AMSISDN 1 ISDN 56 (RDI)
†
AMSISDN 1 ISDN64 (UDI)
†
23-15-30
D-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Installation Planning Steps
†
AMSISDN 5 CSFAX (3.1 kHz
audio)
3. Pin Strapping
The following strapping is required
Item
Strapped pins, e.g., TP1A to BP1A
System Mode
†
Data I/O
†
(if applicable)
4. Wiring
Antenna
Multi-Control
†
BITE A/B
†
HPA Mute A/B
†
Power
†
ISDN:
ISDN-1
†
Wire ISDN line. Channel 1 operates over ISDN 1 and channel 3 over
ISDN-2
ISDN 2.
†
Ethernet:
Ethernet-1
†
Ethernet-2
†
Wire both Ethernet ports for SBB capability
Wire both Ethernet ports to deploy 2 separate networks
Inertial Navigation System (INS)
†
Analog Tip/Ring
†
5. Configuration
Program the Land Earth Station (LES)/Ground Earth Station (GES) Access Codes
†
Program devices with the Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN)
†
Configure the CNX Cabin Gateway if required
†
23-15-30
D-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX E: INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Aircraft Identification:
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal Model No:
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Installation Mode:
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal Serial No:
Name
Signature
Date
Checks completed by:
Approved/Witnessed by:
Installation / Mechanical
Section
Parameter
Item
N/A
Value
Service/maintenance access
Physical
Environmental considerations—see
"Environmental Requirements" on page 3-2
Plug configuration—see "Fan Tray
Requirements" on page 3-3
Fan Tray
Chassis bonding—see "Chassis Grounding"
on page 3-4
Fan rotation—unobstructed
ARINC 600 Con. Polarized pins
23-15-30
E-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Section
Parameter
Item
N/A
Value
+ 28 V dc polarity
Power
Connections
115 V ac polarity
Chassis grounding
Voltage Levels
Installation / Electrical
IRS Input (x2)
+ 28 V dc level
115 V ac level
IRS wiring
IRS format
SDI
Config. Strap
Pins
System configuration
ICAO address
WOW (optional)
Ethernet
Wired to RJ45 distribution points (x2)
ISDN
Wired to RJ45 distribution points
Manual reset switch operation
Remotes
Maintenance port (DB9 access)
Power and fault indicators
RF Coaxial
Antenna
Test Test On-Air Test
Configuration
Rx input cable loss
Tx output cable loss
Antenna manufacturer and type
Wired as per manufacturer
LES/GES access codes
ICAO ID
CEPT
Wired to distribution point
CMU/CMC
Wired to equipment
MCDU/WSCI
Wired to equipment
4-Wire (x2)
Wired to equipment
POTS
Wired to distribution point
System
Power-Up
Visual LED indications
Power-up computer display
Reset message observed
System Logon
Optional Checks
Logon verified for Swift 64 and SBB
Ground segment
Flight segment
Move the aircraft in a circle and check the signal and C/No.
23-15-30
E-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Heading Antenna Antenna
(Deg) Selected Azimuth
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Swift 64 or SBB
CH 1
CH 2
Classic
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
Note: Channels 3, 4, and 5 can be different than channels 1,
and 2.
C/NoSignalC/NoSignalC/No SignalC/No SignalC/No Signal
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
165
180
195
210
225
240
255
270
285
300
315
330
345
360
23-15-30
E-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
E-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX F: CMU MESSAGES
The CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of communications:
Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both types of communication are
supported at the same time.
This section includes descriptions of the messages that the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
In this communication type, the CMU uses an ARINC 429 bus to convey status word exchanges,
join/leave words, and other control and command communications to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
using conventional ARINC 429 broadcast techniques.
The CMU can transmit messages to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive messages from the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using this communication type.
1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
This section provides details about the words sent to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the CMUs:
•
Understanding System Identification Label 172
•
Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270
•
Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276
•
Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg
A. Understanding System Identification Label 172
Each CMU transmits system identification label 172 (SAL 304) to the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal. Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this
label. Any other SAL is ignored.
B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270
Each CMU transmits status word 1 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The standby CMU
checks to see if its status words are the same as the active CMU using its cross-talk
connections.
Table F-1 Status Word 1
Bit
Label
Meaning
270
Determines the position of the CMU in the cockpit; see Table F-2
10
270
Determines the position of the CMU in the cockpit; see Table F-2
20
270
Determines which CMU is active and which is on standby
The HSD-440 terminal uses bit 20 to determine which CMU is active. When bit 20 is set,
that CMU is active, and the other CMU should have its bit 20 cleared. In the event of an
error and both CMUs are shown as active, the CMU on input port 1 is considered active.
23-15-30
F-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
The CMU transmits its position in the cockpit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using bits
9 and 10, as shown in Table F-2.
Table F-2 Bits 9 and 10 Positions
SDI 1 (bit 9)
SDI 2 (bit 10)
Position
Single
Left
Right
Not used
Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.
C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276
Each CMU transmits status word 2 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark
2 Terminal determines which CMU is sending the message based upon bits 9/10 (the
SDI) as detailed in Table F-2.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the SAT Link parameter (bit 19) to determine if the
CMU is receiving the appropriate link status from the HSD-440 terminal.
Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.
D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via Williamsburg
Data is transferred to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using Williamsburg protocol.
Williamsburg messages use the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In
this case, the label is 307 as the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to
the CMU is 307. For more information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page
F-7.
2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
This section provides details about the words sent from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the
CMUs:
•
Understanding System Identification Label 172
•
Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270
•
Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271
•
Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg
A. Understanding System Identification Label 172
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits subsytem identifier label 172 which contains
the subsystem SAL in bits 9 to 16. The SAL is set to 307 (octal). Also:
•
Bit 17 is set to indicate Inmarsat Aero
•
Bits 18-31 are used for other Satcom services (or are spare) and are set to 0
23-15-30
F-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Bit 32 indicates parity
You can find the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal identity information in the ORT. If no
information is available, the terminal identifies itself as SAL 307 by default.
ARINC 781 Supplement 1 describes the word format of these labels.
B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270
Bits are defined as shown in Table F-3.
Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits
Bit(s)
Description
9–10 SDI (per ARINC
Specification 429
Section 2.1.4)
11
12
13
14
Data Link via CMU
Inactive
CMU 1 Inactive
Voice Unavailable
SELCAL
If Set
•
Set to 00, all call
•
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not able to offer Aero H data
services (due to a hardware fault or terminal is not logged on)
•
ORT indicates that only CMU #1 is wired and label 270 is
missing for 3 or more seconds
•
ORT indicates that only CMU #2 is wired and label 270 is
missing for 3 or more seconds
•
ORT indicates that both CMU #1 and CMU #2 are wired and
both label 270 are missing for 3 ore more seconds
•
CMU #1 bus label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds
•
Label 270 SSM coded to fail
•
Label 270 bit 20 is not set
•
Class Aero is not logged on
•
Login Class is 1 or 4 (data only)
This bit is set during the period when a ground to air call, including
a preemptive call, is being signaled but unanswered. If set:
•
Indicates that a new cockpit voice circuit has been
established for a ground-initiated call
•
Depending on the aircraft setting, this bit may result in a visual
annunciation of the new call on the EICAS/ECAM/EDU and
activation of the cockpit chime
•
Crew should refer to the EICAS/ECAM/EDU to determine
which system is annunciating the call
•
Bit should remain set until an appropriate acknowledgement
is received
•
Crew should make sure that the bit has been cleared in all
transmitted samples for at least two seconds prior to being
set, and then set for at least four seconds or until the
annunciation is acknowledged, whichever occurs last
23-15-30
F-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits (Continued)
Bit(s)
15
Description
Message Alert with
Chime
If Set
•
Refer to MCDU messages for timely information
•
Terminal should clear this bit once positive pilot response has
been detected
16
Message Alert without
Chime
•
This bit is never set, it is reserved for future use.
17
Not Logged-On
•
Terminal is not logged onto a ground station
18
Master/Slave
•
This bit is never set, slave operation is not supported.
•
19
CMU 2 Inactive
•
CMU 2 transmission of valid Label 270 is detected inactive
•
Label 270 SSM coded to fail on CMU #2
•
Label 270 bit 20 is not set
20
Cockpit Fault
•
Not used
21
Cockpit Voice Fault
•
Not used
22
Voice Call 1
•
Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming
voice call on channel 1
23
Voice Call 2
•
Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming
voice call on channel 2
24
Voice Alert 1
•
Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck
incoming voice call on channel 1
25
Voice Alert 2
•
Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck
incoming voice call on channel 2
26
Cockpit Voice
Communication 1
•
A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 1
27
Cockpit Voice
Communication 2
•
A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 2
•
Never set
•
No active CMU is available at the SDU, or the active CMU
does not respond with a Loop Word in response to a Test
Word
•
This bit being set can be caused by the following:
28
29
Data
•
•
Bus inactivity on all CMU inputs
•
Bus activity, but no declared active CMU
Bit may be used to set a cockpit advisory message (for
example, >SATCOM DATA) indicating to the flight crew a loss
of data link capability due to a failure in the CMU interface.
* These bits are cleared when the chime light inhibit discrete signal is asserted.
23-15-30
F-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271
Each of the Aeronautical Telecommunications Network (ATN) subnetworks transmits join
and leave words to the CMU whenever a path to a specified ground address changes.
The join event notifies the CMU that a new path to a specified ground address is available,
triggering ATN air-to-ground communications. The leave event notifies the CMU that a
path to a specified ground address has been closed, ending ATN air-to-ground
communications.
The Join/Leave word (label 271) is transmitted on the CMU bus at a minimum rate of
once per second or be event driven based on log on and log off events as specified by
the 'CMU - SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION' ORT parameter.
Table F-4 shows the definitions of the bits in the join/leave word.
Table F-4 Join/Leave Word Bits
Bits
Bits 8–1
Bits 16–9
Defines
Word Label 271:
•
Uses the A429 convention
•
Coded as 10011101
GES ID:
•
0 is an invalid ID
•
FF is used for all GESs
•
ID numbers between 1 and FE are valid GES IDs
•
GES ID is known to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
•
Bits are cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on
Bits 22–17
Satellite ID
Bits 25–23
Inmarsat Service:
•
Aero H+ 011
Bits 28–26
Not used; padded with zeros
Bit 29
Data link from the AES to the GES:
Bits 31–30
•
Available (a Join message; Bit = 1)
•
Not Available (a Leave message; Bit = 0)
•
Identified by the GES ID and Satellite ID fields
•
CMU uses this information to initiate network layer virtual circuits with
available ground routers by determining the ground routers’ DTE
addresses from the provided GES identity
•
Bits 9–16, (GES) and Bits 17–22 (Satellite ID) uniquely identify a GES
•
Aero Service Type field may be used by the CMU to make routing decisions
•
Bit is cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on.
SSM information (ARINC 429 para 2.1.5.2)
23-15-30
F-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg
Data is transferred to the CMU using Williamsburg protocol. Williamsburg messages use
the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In this case, the label is 304 as
the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to the CMU is 304. For more
information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page F-7.
NOTE: Universal brand CMUs broadcast a different SAL in Label 172, but expect
transmission on a SAL of 304. This is achieved through the use of the CMU-SDU
HARD CODED SAL ORT parameter.
3. Understanding BOP Options
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the following BOP options for the CMU interface. The ORT
specifies the values for these options. If no information is available, then the options default to
the values shown in Table F-5.
Table F-5 BOP Option Defaults
Option
Value
O1
Half
O2
ORT value
Notes
Half or Full Duplex Operation
High or Low Speed Bus
Low speed is default
O3
No
Automatic CTS when ready
O4
No
Accept Automatic CTS
O5
Yes (high-speed
data terminal)
O6
--
Spare
O7
--
Spare
O8
Yes
System Priority to Resolve RTS Conflict
Use of SOLO word
(TEST/LOOP)
O9
--
Spare
O10
Yes
Destination code in RTS/CTS /NCTS/BUSY Used
O11
Yes
Bit-Protocol verification
O12
No
Use subsystem SAL from ALO word
23-15-30
F-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
4. Understanding LDUs and File Size
BOP messages use Link Data Units (LDUs) encoded in binary octets to transmit data. LDUs
conform to the following rules:
•
The data is transmitted from a source and is received by a sink.
•
LDUs consist of a set of contiguous ARINC 429 32 bit data words.
•
The initial data word of each LDU shall be a Start of Transmission (SOT) word.
•
The end data word of each LDU shall be an End of Transmission (EOT).
•
No data file shall exceed 255 LDUs.
5. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count
LDUs may vary in size from 3 to 255 ARINC 429 words. The minimum LDU consists of one
SOT word, one data word, and one EOT word, and the maximum LDU consists of one SOT,
253 data words, and one EOT.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal calculates word count when it organizes an LDU for transmission.
The word count appears in the RTS and CTS data words. See "Understanding Protocol Words"
on page F-9.
6. Understanding Word Format
The general word format of a BOP word is given in ARINC 429 (Attachment 11, Table 11-A).
The bit definitions are shown in Table F-6.
Table F-6 BOP Word Format
Bit Position
Description
8-1
SAL
24-9
Data (28-9 for full data words)
28-25
GFI, control data or word type extensions
31-29
Word type
32
Parity bit
A. Understanding SALs
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends LDUs by point to point by using a label field to carry
the destination SAL; therefore, each LDU that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends is
prefixed by the SAL for the CMU, SAL 304.
The SAL for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is 307 (if designated SDU 1) or 173 (if
designated SDU 2). See ARINC 429, Part 1, attachment 1-1 for a complete list of all SALs.
B. Understanding Data
Data is sent in 4 or 5 nibble words. See "Understanding Word Types" on page F-8
23-15-30
F-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) Definitions
Table F-7 defines the GFI definitions.
Table F-7 GFI Definitions
To
HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal
CMU
File Type
Label
Destination
Code
Label
Destination
Code
304
307 (1)
Data 2 enveloped message
GFI
1110b (Eh)
A GFI of 1110 b indicates a data 2 Enveloped ACARS Message. This message indicates
to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that this message is to be passed on through the ACARS
network. Only one message is transferred per link layer ARINC 429 file. If the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal is unable to deliver an enveloped message to its destination (CMU or
GES), the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal discards the message.
A data-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits to the GES all messages passed from the
avionics network interface during the time that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged
on. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on, any messages passed to the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall be discarded. While the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is
logged on, any messages received from the GES shall be forwarded to the avionics
network interface regardless of the state or availability of the destination avionics
equipment.
Any CMU message contains a destination code of M if it arrives from the ground to the
CMU. Similarly, any message originating from the CMU that is destined for a GES
contains a destination code of S. These codes are embedded in the RTS, CTS, and
NCTS protocol words (See "Understanding Protocol Words" on page F-9).
7. Understanding Word Types
The word types in Table F-8 are valid. For a full definition, see ARINC 429 P3, attachment 11.
Table F-8 Word Types
31
30
29
WORD TYPE
Full Binary Data Word
Partial Binary Data Word
Start of Frame—Version 3
End of Frame—Version 3
Protocol Word
Solo Word
Start Of Transmission—Version 1
End Of Transmission—Version 1
23-15-30
F-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
A. Understanding the Full Binary Data Word
This word shall transmit 5 nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for details.
B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data Word
This word shall transmit 4 or less nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for
details.
C. Understanding Protocol Words
The protocol words are shown in Table F-9. The protocol identifier occupies bits 28-25
of the protocol word.
Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses
Protocol word
RTS
(Request to Send)
CTS
(Clear to Send)
Uses
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal issues an RTS to the CMU when it is
ready to send an LDU. The RTS contains a destination code (bits 24–
17) and a word count (bits 16–9).
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an RTS, it issues a CTS
to the CMU when the CMU is ready to send an LDU. The CTS contains
the same destination code and word count as the HSD-440 Mark 2
Terminal received in the RTS.
Bit 11 of the Status Word Label 270 from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
indicates when a satellite link is available to proceed if this is a ground
destination message.
NCTS
(Not Clear to Send)
NAK
(negative
acknowledgement)
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal either receives a valid RTS and is
not ready to accept data or receives an RTS with an invalid destination
or word count, it responds with an NCTS. The NCTS contains a
destination code (bits 24–17).
If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal notes a missing SOT or EOT word,
parity error, word count error, CRC error, or time out error, it will respond
with a NAK. The NAK contains the same file sequence number in bits
24–17 as the SOT word.
ACK
(acknowledgement)
If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transfers each word within the
designated time and with odd parity, correct word count, and verified
CRC. The LDU is either next, first, or a duplicate. Then the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal sends an ACK. The ACK word contains the file
sequence number (bits 24–17) and the LDU sequence number (bits 16–
9).
ALO
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can initiate BOP V1 communication by
sending an ALO word out on the bus.
(aloha)
The first ALO word that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits contains
the highest version number it supports (bits 12–9). This word determines
the correct protocol to use for the exchange. The ALO also sends its own
SAL (bits 24–17).
ALR
(aloha response)
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an ALO word, it leaves its
present task and responds with an ALR word. The response contains
the protocol version level supported.
23-15-30
F-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses (Continued)
Protocol word
Uses
SYN
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits a SYN word to inform the CMU
that the construction of the last file that was transmitted is confused. The
reception of a SYN word causes the CMU to abort any reception or
transmission in progress. In addition, if the CMU was transmitting, it
should re-initiate transmission of the file that was aborted.
Destination code
RTS, CTS, and NTCS words use a destination code. The destination
code field (when used, bits 24–17) indicates the final destination of the
LDU. If the LDU will be used in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the
destination code can be set to 00h. If the LDU is intended to be passed
on to another onboard system, the destination code indicates that
system.
Word count
RTS and CTS words use a word count. The word count field (bits 16–9)
reflects the number of ARINC 429 words that will be transmitted in a
subsequent LDU. The maximum word count value is 255 ARINC 429
words.
D. Understanding the Solo Word
If the data the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is sending consists of only 1 or 2 octets, then
the data can be sent blind using the solo word instead of obtaining a CTS. Solo words
conform to the following rules:
•
The solo word contains a 16 bit data field in bits 24–9
•
Bits 31–29 are permanently set to 101b
•
Solo words are not acknowledged at the link level
•
Solo words are not interleaved with data file words during a data file transfer, however
if the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a solo word during data transfer, the
HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall process the solo word normally and resume file
transmission or reception.
The solo word also performs test and loop back functions to test the integrity of the ARINC
429 bus interconnection between the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and the CMU.
The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send a 16 bit loop test pattern word (TEST) on the
ARINC 429 TX bus. The CMU then responds with the identical loop test pattern word
(LOOP) on the ARINC 429 RX bus. If the LOOP does not match the TEST, the HSD-440
Mark 2 Terminal indicates a TEST failure.
If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a TEST on its ARINC 429 RX bus, it responds
by transmitting an identical LOOP on the ARINC 429 TX bus.
A 4 bit identifier (bits 28–25) identifies the nature of the data being sent by the solo word.
The three types of data are shown in Table F-10.
Table F-10 Data Types
Purpose
Bits 28-25b
Description
Test
0000b
16 Bit Test Pattern
23-15-30
F-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table F-10 Data Types (Continued)
Loop
0001b
16 Bit Loop Back
Solo Word
ID
16 Bit Data Filed
E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT)
When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a valid CTS with the destination code and
word count of the previous RTS, then it responds by sending an SOT word immediately
before the LDU. The SOT contains the file sequence number, the GFI, and the LDU
sequence number.
The file sequence number (bits 24–17) of the SOT word is an 8 bit number assigned to
the data file. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each new file sent over the
link. After reaching FFh, the file sequence number returns to 01h and recommences
incrementing by 1h for each new file sent. A file consisting of multiple LDUs has the same
file sequence number in each SOT word of each LDU. The file sequence number is also
used in ACK and NAK words.
The LDU sequence number (bits 16–9) of the SOT word is an 8 Bit number assigned to
the LDU. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each LDU sent (of the same file).
The LDU sequence number resets to 00h at the beginning of each new file. The LDU
sequence number is also used in the ACK word.
F.
Understanding End of Transmission (EOT)
Each LDU is terminated by an EOT word. Bit 25 indicates if this LDU is the final LDU of
the transfer. If it is, then this bit shall be set to 1; if it is not the final LDU, it shall be set to
0. The EOT also contains the CRC word in bits 24–9. See ARINC 429 P3, paragraph
2.5.12, for details on generating and decoding the CRC word.
23-15-30
F-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
F-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX G: INTERNATIONAL ACCESS AND
COUNTRY CODES
Table G-1 shows a list of countries with their associated country codes and international access
codes.
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Afghanistan
93
00
Albania
355
00
Algeria
213
00
Angola
244
00
Anguilla
+1 (264)
011
Antigua
+1 (268)
011
Argentina
54
00
Armenia
374
00
Aruba
297
00
Australia
61
00 11
Austria
43
00
Bahamas
+1 (242)
011
Bahrain
973
00
Bangladesh
880
00
Barbados
+1 (246)
011
Belarus
375
810
Belgium
32
00
Belize
501
00
Benin
229
00
Bermuda
+1 (441)
011
Bolivia
591
00 10
Bosnia and Hercegovina
387
99
Botswana
267
00
Brazil
55
00
British Virgin Islands
+1 (284)
011
Bulgaria
359
00
Burkina Faso
226
00
Burma (Myanmar)
95
00
Burundi
257
90
Cambodia
855
001
23-15-30
G-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Cameroon
237
00
Canada
011
Cape Verde
238
Cayman Islands
+1 (345)
011
Central African Republic
236
19
Chad
235
15
Chile
56
00
China
86
00
Colombia
57
009
Comoros
269
00
Congo (Brazzaville)
242
00
Congo (Kinshasa, formerly Zaire)
243
00
Cook Islands
682
00
Costa Rica
506
00
Cote d'Ivoire (Ivory Coast)
225
00
Croatia
385
99
Cuba
53
119
Cyprus
357
00
Czech Republic
420
00
Denmark
45
00
Diego-Garcia
246
00
Djibouti
253
00
Dominica
+1 (767)
011
Dominican Republic
+1 (809), +1 (829)
011
East Timor
670
00
Ecuador
593
00
Egypt
20
00
El Salvador
503
Equatorial Guinea
240
00
Eritrea
291
00
Estonia
372
810
Ethiopia
251
00
Falkland Islands
500
01
Faroe Islands
298
009
Fiji
679
Finland
358
00
France
33
00
23-15-30
G-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
French Antilles
590
00
French Guiana
594
00
French Polynesia
689
00
Gabon
241
00
Gambia
220
00
Germany
49
00
Ghana
233
00
Gibraltar
350
00
Greece
30
00
Greenland
299
009
Grenada
+1 (473)
011
Guam
+1 (671)
011
Guatemala
502
00
Guinea
224
00
Guinea-Bissau
245
00
Guyana
592
001
Haiti
509
00
Honduras
504
00
Hong Kong
852
001
Hungary
36
00
Iceland
354
90
India
91
900
Indonesia
62
001, 008
Iran
98
00
Iraq
964
00
Ireland
353
00
Israel
972
00
Italy
39
00
Ivory Coast (Cote d'Ivoire)
225
00
Jamaica
+1 (876)
011
Japan
81
010
Jordan
962
00
Kazakstan
810
Kenya
254
000
Kuwait
965
00
Kyrgyz Republic
996
00
Laos
856
00
23-15-30
G-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Latvia
371
810
Lebanon
961
00
Lesotho
266
00
Liberia
231
00
Libya
218
00
Liechtenstein
423
00
Lithuania
370
00
Luxembourg
352
00
Macao
853
00
Macedonia
389
00
Madagascar
261
16
Malawi
265
101
Malaysia
60
00
Maldives
960
00
Mali
223
00
Malta
356
356
Marshall Islands
692
011
Martinique
596
00
Mauritania
222
00
Mauritius
230
00
Mayotte and Reunion
262
10
Mexico
52
98
Micronesia
691
011
Moldova
373
00
Monaco
377
00
Mongolia
976
001
Montenegro
382
00
Montserrat
+1 (664)
011
Morocco
212
00
Mozambique
258
00
Namibia
264
00
Nauru
674
00
Nepal
977
00
Netherlands
31
00
New Caledonia
687
00
New Zealand
64
00
Nicaragua
505
00
23-15-30
G-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Niger
227
00
Nigeria
234
009
Niue Island
683
00
North Korea
850
00
Northern Mariana Islands
(Commonwealth of)
+1 (670)
011
Norway
47
095
Oman
968
00
Pakistan
92
00
Palau
680
011
Palestine
970
00
Panama
507
00
Papua New Guinea
675
05
Paraguay
595
002
Peru
51
00
Philippines
63
00
Poland
48
00
Portugal
351
00
Puerto Rico
+1 (787)
011
Qatar
974
00
Romania
40
71
Russia
810
Rwanda
250
00
Samoa
685
San Marino
378
00
Saudi Arabia
966
00
Senegal
221
00
Serbia
381
99
Seychelles
248
00
Sierra Leone
232
00
Singapore
65
001
Slovakia
421
00
Slovenia
386
99
Solomon Islands
677
00
Somalia
252
00
South Africa
27
00
South Korea
82
00
23-15-30
G-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Spain
34
00
Sri Lanka
94
00
St Helena and Tristan da Cunha
290
00
St Kitts
+1 (869)
011
St Lucia
+1 (758)
011
St Pierre and Miquelon
508
00
St Vincent
+1 (784)
011
Sudan
249
00
Suriname
597
002
Swaziland
268
00
Sweden
46
00
Switzerland
41
00
Syria
963
00
Taiwan
886
002
Tajikistan
992
810
Tanzania
255
000
Thailand
66
001
Togolese Republic
228
00
Tokelau
690
00
Tonga
676
09
Trinidad and Tobago
+1 (868)
011
Tunisia
216
00
Turkey
90
99
Turkmenistan
993
810
Turks and Caicos
+1 (649)
011
Tuvalu, Ellice Islands
688
00
U.S. Pacific Islands
+1 670, +1 671,
+1 684
011
U.S. Virgin Islands
+1 (340)
011
Uganda
256
000
Ukraine
380
810
United Arab Emirates
971
00
United Kingdom
44
00
United States
011
Uruguay
598
00
Uzbekistan
998
810
Vanuatu
678
00
23-15-30
G-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)
Country
Country Code
International Access Code
Vatican City
+39, +379
00
Venezuela
58
00
Vietnam
84
00
Wallis and Futuna
681
19
Yemen
967
00
Yugoslavia
(+38 discontinued)
99
Zambia
260
00
Zimbabwe
263
110
23-15-30
G-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
G-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
APPENDIX H: INMARSAT CAUSE CODES
Table H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
1001
Call cleared by MES terminal (normal termination of call)
1011
Call failed, MES terminal busy
1012
Call cleared, MES terminal busy
1021
Call failed, MES time-out (no answer)
1081
Call failed, MES terminal not installed
1091
Call failed, MES terminal out-of-service
1092
Call cleared, MES terminal out-of-service
1141
MES preempted clear by higher priority call
1142
MES preempted fixed call by higher priority call
1143
Offered call cleared, pre-empted at MES
1144
Call cleared, MES initiated preemption
1145
Attempted call cleared, pre-empted at MES
1146
Attempted call abandoned by MES terminal
1202
Handover, MES ready
1281
Call failed, MES cannot accept
1291
Call failed, MES cannot accept at present
1351
Call cleared, insufficient free memory
1361
Call cleared by MES cable unwrap
1362
Call cleared, long interruption in reception at MES
1363
MES secondary clear due to re-point OR
1391
Call cleared, traveled distance exceeds 700km
1392
Call cleared, spot beam transition (call terminated because aircraft left
spot beam)
1393
Call cleared, cooperative mode
1451
Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested
1452
Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit)
23-15-30
H-1
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
1502
Handover, LES Ready, normal clear
1551
Call failed, LES congested (no channel)
1581
Call failed, service not provided at this LES
1591
Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES
1592
Call cleared, credit card type not supported
1651
Call failed, LES congested (no channel terminal)
1661
Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES
1662
LES long term blockage of SCPC MES
1790
Call cleared, failure credit card validation process
1791
Call cleared, failure authentication process
1811
NCS MES ID busy
1812
NCS MES ID busy IPDS
1841
Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.1 call
1842
Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.2 call
1843
Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.3 call
1844
Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption
1851
Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject no SCPC available
1852
Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject SCPC does not match
request
1853
Call failed, lease channel congestion
1854
Call failed, MES outside spot beam coverage area
1855
Call rejected, preemption failed, no channel available
1856
Call rejected, spot beam selection failed
1857
Handover failed, channel not available
2000
MES int reject MES RQ invalid CNO
2001
MES int reject MES RQ failed qualification
2010
MES int reject MES RP invalid CNO
2011
MES int reject MES RP failed qualification
2012
MES int reject MES RP operation timeout
2020
MES int reject NCSA missing
23-15-30
H-2
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
2021
MES int reject NCSA invalid CNO
2022
MES int reject NCSA failed qualification
2023
Call failed, Signal lost on NCSA during call setup, check antenna and
try again
2024
Call failed, Missing channel assignment, try again
2025
Call failed, Signal lost on NCSC during call setup, check antenna and
try again
2030
MES int reject LES ID failed qualification
2040
MES int reject SCCS invalid CNO
2041
MES int reject SCCS not paired
2048
Call failed, invalid number dialed
2049
Call failed, terminal not ready for call, try later
2050
Call failed, Not allowed to make another mobile call yet, wait 20 seconds
and try again
2051
Call failed, dialed number is barred
2052
Call failed, LES selected is barred
2053
Call failed, number dialed must be in a phonebook
2053
Call failed, terminal can only be used with a valid SIM
2055
Call failed, user not logged in
2056
Call failed, user not logged in to SIM
2057
Call failed, LES is not in SIM allowed list
2058
Call cleared, SIM removed during call
2059
Call failed, terminal is locked for outgoing calls
2060
MES int reject NCSS failed qualification
2061
MES int reject spot beam invalid
2062
Call failed, no spot beams in the ocean region, select another OR
2063
Terminal ID is not set correctly, check with dealer
2070
Lost NCSC signal, seeking
2071
Stand-Alone Mode finished, seeking network
2080
SIM error, check SIM is inserted correctly
23-15-30
H-3
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
2090
MES int reject ORR query invalid
2091
MES int reject ORR invalid
2092
MES int reject MES RR failed qualification
2093
MES int reject MES RR invalid CNO
2094
MES int reject NCRA missing
2095
MES int reject NCRA lost lock
2100
MES int reject illegal call type
2101
MES Int reject illegal peripheral
2102
Call request failed, call already in progress
2103
Call failed, star code is badly formatted
2104
Call failed, cannot accept two address book star codes
2105
Call failed, address book entry not found
2106
Call failed, star code does not exist
2120
MES int reject no transmit power available
2200
Battery flat for terminal operation
2201
Call cleared, used all allocated time for call type
2300
MES int reject no coop response
2301
MES int reject no power
2302
MES int reject no location report
2400
MES int reject no ORA SU found
8000
ACSE Recycling
8001
ACSE Top Of Find BB
8002
ACSE Top Of Process BB
8010
ACSE Finding Primary NCS Long
8011
ACSE Finding Secondary NCS Short
8012
ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Short
8013
ACSE Finding Primary NCS Short
8014
ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Long
8018
ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Short
23-15-30
H-4
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
8019
ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Long
8020
ACSE Found Primary NCS
8021
ACSE Found Secondary NCS
8022
ACSE Found Primary Standalone
8023
ACSE Found Secondary Standalone
8024
ACSE found primary NGNCS
8025
ACSE found secondary NGNCS
8030
ACSE NSR Invalid
8040
ACSE Inert
8041
ACSE ODU Status
8080
ACSE NSR Valid
8081
ACSE NSR Valid LES A
8100
ACSE Booting
8110
ACSE Booted
8120
ACSE FIDR ID Invalid
8200
ACSE Spot Beam Selection
8201
ACSE Next Spot Beam
8202
ACSE Successful Spot Beam Selection
8203
ACSE Failed To Find Spot Beam
8204
ACSE Spot Beam Selective Clear
8210
ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No ID
8211
ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No TDM
8300
ACSE ORR
8301
ACSE Successful ORR
8302
ACSE Failed ORR
8303
ACSE No ORR
8304
ACSE ORR Tune NCRA
8305
ACSE ORR MES RR
8306
ACSE failed retry ORR
23-15-30
H-5
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
8310
ACSE ORR Query Begin
8311
ACSE ORR Query Burst
8312
ACSE ORR Query Successful
8313
ACSE ORR Query Failed
8400
ACSE Fixed Begin
8401
ACSE Fixed MESRP
8402
ACSE Fixed Call Type Set
8410
ACSE Fixed Tune NCSA
8411
ACSE Fixed Channel Assignment
8420
ACSE Fixed Clearing Call
8421
ACSE Fixed Selective Clear
8480
ACSE Fixed SCPC Begin
8481
ACSE Fixed SCPC Transmitting
8482
ACSE Fixed Authentication Begin
8483
ACSE Fixed Authentication End
8484
ACSE Fixed Power Control
8485
ACSE Fixed MES Connect
8486
ACSE Fixed Ringing Begin
8500
ACSE Mobile Begin
8501
ACSE Mobile MES RQ1
8502
ACSE Mobile MES RQ2
8503
ACSE Mobile Call Type Set
8510
ACSE Mobile Tune NCSA
8511
ACSE Mobile Channel Assignment
8520
ACSE Mobile Clearing Call
8521
ACSE Mobile Selective Clear
8580
ACSE Mobile SCPC Begin
8581
ACSE Mobile SCPC Transmitting
8582
ACSE Mobile Authentication Begin
23-15-30
H-6
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
8583
ACSE Mobile Authentication End
8584
ACSE Mobile Power Control
8585
ACSE Mobile LES Connect
8586
ACSE Mobile Ringing Begin
8600
MPDS SCPC Mode Selected
8800
ACSE cable call begin
8801
ACSE cable call successful
8900
ACSE Logoff Begin
8901
ACSE Successful Logoff
8902
ACSE No ORR Logoff
9000
ACSE accepts call
9003
ACSE accepted
9004
ACSE rejected
9020
ACSE call waiting
9021
ACSE idle selective clear
9022
ACSE TDM not found
9080
ACSE rejected fixed call due to invalid NSR
9081
ACSE In MRSi
9082
ACSE sounder turned on
9083
ACSE sounder turned off
9084
ACSE in lock
9085
ACSE out of lock
9086
ACSE ext sounder turned on
9087
ACSE ext sounder turned off
9088
ACSE timer about to expire
9090
ACSE Smartcard activated
9091
ACSE Smartcard removed
9092
ACSE Smartcard error
9100
Peripheral on hook
23-15-30
H-7
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
9101
Peripheral off hook
9102
Peripheral connected
9103
Peripheral ringing
9104
Peripheral ready
9105
Peripheral hanging up
9106
Peripheral hang up
9107
Peripheral not responding
9108
Peripheral dialing
9109
Peripheral abort dialing
9120
Peripheral DTMF accepted
9121
Peripheral DTMF rejected
9122
Peripheral invalid request
9123
Peripheral valid request
9124
Peripheral bonding auto
9125
Peripheral bonding slave
9126
Peripheral bonding none
9130
Peripheral STU enabled
9131
Peripheral STU disabled
9200
MSG T_AM received
9201
MSG A_AM received
9202
MSG T_HA received
9203
MMI normal
9204
MMI inert
9205
MMI programming
9206
MMI reboot
9207
MMI powerdown
9208
MMI accepted
9209
MMI rejected
400000
CT SP bad
23-15-30
H-8
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
400000
No call pending
400001
CT SP good
400002
CT SP full
400003
CT SP access denied
400080
CT SP find
400081
CT SP enumerate
400082
CT SP no entries
400090
CT SP delete
400100
CT SP spot beam selection
400105
CT SP MPDS
400110
CT SP ocean region registration
400111
CT SP ORR query
400112
CT SP log off
400120
CT SP cable call
400200
CT SP go idle
400201
CT SP go idle due to configuration
400202
CT SP selective clear
400208
CT SP go idle clear spot beam
400209
CT SP go idle clear NSR
400210
CT SP go inert
400211
CT SP go inert Smartcard
400212
CT SP go inert DDS poll
400900
CT SP ODU status
400901
CT SP ODU status no alarms
400902
CT SP ODU status DDS
400910
CT SP prod test
400911
CT SP prod test ODU
401000
CT SP clear spot beam
800124
Mobile Aero 64k speech
23-15-30
H-9
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
800404
Mobile data
800504
Mobile facsimile
800606
Mobile 64k UDI
800607
Mobile 56k UDI
800610
Mobile 64k audio 3k1
800622
Mobile Aero 64k UDI
800623
Mobile Aero 56k UDI
800625
Mobile Aero 64k audio 3k1
11A0
Call cleared, credit card not accepted
11D1
Call failed, Request data invalid
11D2
Call failed, insufficient digits in service address
11D3
Call failed, invalid service address
11D4
Call cleared, credit card data information invalid
11D5
Call cleared, invalid country code
11D6
Call cleared, PID information is not consistent
11D7
Call rejected, invalid service for Pri.1 or 2 call
11D8
Call cleared, dialed number not 2 or 3 digits for Pr.1 or 2 call
11E0
Call cleared, invalid credit card PIN at this LES
11E1
Call cleared, too many invalid credit card call attempts
12B1
Call cleared by MES for unspecified reason, for example:
•
GPS conflict
•
Insufficient HPA power available to make call
•
HPA over current
12C2
Call cleared, no credit card valid message received
12C3
Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer)
12C4
Call cleared, authentication query not received (usually caused by call
setup failure)
12C5
Call cleared, MES missing sup service SU
12C6
Call cleared, MES missing sup service 2SU
12C7
Call cleared, MES missing SCPC channel release SU sup service
23-15-30
H-10
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
12C8
Handover failed, LES not detected
12D1
Call failed, Spot-beam data invalid
12D2
Call failed, invalid scrambling vector
15A1
Call failed, MES not authorized at this LES
15A2
Call failed, service not authorized at this LES
15A3
Call cleared, credit card not authorized
15A4
Call cleared, authentication reply invalid
15A5
Call failed, PID not authorized for any service
15A6
Call failed, PID not authorized for requested service
15B1
Call cleared by LES for unspecified reason
15C1
Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment)
15C2
Call failed, LES time-out (no service address)
15C3
Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector)
15C4
Call failed, no service address and no scrambling vector
15C5
Call cleared, incomplete credit card data information
15C7
Call failed, LES time-out (no MES Connect)
15C9
Call cleared, no authentication reply
15CA
Call cleared, notification ack not received
15CB
Call cleared, invalid sequence number in notification ack
15CC
Handover failed, no response to request
15CD
Handover failed, MES not ready
15D1
Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment)
15D2
LES MES already busy
15E1
Call cleared but MES still transmitting (FAULT)
16C2
LES missing MES SCPC
16C3
Handover failed, MES not detected
18A1
NCS MES ID not found
18A2
Call failed, MES not authorized
18A3
Call failed, LES not authorized
23-15-30
H-11
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
18B1
Call failed by NCS for unspecified reason
18B2
Call rejected, invalid service requested
18C1
NCS MES burst missing
18C3
NCS MES busy preemption failed
18D1
Call failed, invalid call request
18E1
NCS MES busy already
18E2
NCS MES busy already MPDS
1F01
Call cleared by terrestrial circuit (normal call termination from ground
source)
1F11
Call failed, terrestrial party busy
1F21
Call failed, LES time-out (no answer)
1F61
Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure (call attempted during ORR)
1F62
Call failed, early clear by terrestrial circuit
2F00
LES int reject lack of MES RESP response
2F01
LES int reject lack of MES ARN response
2F02
LES int reject incorrect SVECSCPC
4000A0
CT SP any
4000F0
CT Terminal ID
4000F1
CT Options
4000F2
CT config names
80010F
Mobile 64k speech
8D0FFF
Mobile Mini-M
8E0FFF
Mobile HSD
8F0FFF
Mobile
90A0
EXPPORT bonding started
90A1
EXPPORT bonding ended
90A2
EXPPORT remote panel present
90A3
EXPPORT remote panel removed
90B0
ACSE MPDS mode selected
90B1
ACSE SCPC mode selected
23-15-30
H-12
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
90C0
ACSE transmit on
90C1
ACSE transmit off
90D0
ACSE spot beam handover started
90D1
ACSE spot beam termination timer started
90F0
Event log wiped
B000
Mod error, general
B001
Mod error, tune failed
B002
Mod error, mode failed
B003
Mod error, mmr failed
B004
Mod error, not responding
B010
MOD Invalid Mode
B011
MOD Command Invalid
B020
Mod error, su underflow
B021
MOD Su overflow
B022
MOD Su not transmitted
B024
MOD invalid frame no
B025
MOD invalid slot no
B028
MOD cannot Tx Su while tuning
B030
MOD channel out of range
B032
MOD cannot tune while Tx
B033
MOD tuning in progress
B040
MOD error watchdog
B100
DEMOD error, general
B101
DEMOD error, tune failed
B102
DEMOD error, mode failed
B110
DEMOD invalid mode
B130
DEMOD channel out of range
B133
DEMOD tuning in progress
B200
Generic modem error
23-15-30
H-13
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
B201
RF error RX VHF
B202
RF error RX Lband
B204
RF error RX VHF
B208
RF error TX Lband
B210
RF error RF error
B220
RF error Ref error
B27F
Mod watchdog tripped
B280
Generic voice codec errors
B281
TMS spurious interrupt
B300
Outdoor terminal failure, check connections to ODU
B301
ODU error cannot set cable attenuator
B310
ODU error power response missing
B311
ODU error tune response missing
B312
ODU error HPA control response missing
B313
ODU error HPA status response missing
B314
ODU error alarm response missing
B315
ODU error burst timer response missing
B316
ODU error HPA backoff response missing
B320
ODU error alarm heat
B321
ODU error alarm burst
B322
ODU error alarm power
B323
ODU error alarm over voltage
B324
ODU error alarm reverse power
B328
ODU failed due to tx power check
B329
ODU error alarm timeout
B330
ODU error alarm timeout no trip
B400
Internal temperature of terminal too high, turn off for 10 minutes
B401
Internal temperature sensor failed
B410
Mod error, handshake failure, power down/up and try again
23-15-30
H-14
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)
Inmarsat Cause Code
Code Definition
B500
Battery charging communication failure
B501
Power supply error
B580
Battery is over temperature, charging disabled
B581
Battery temperature is now ok, charging enabled
C0010F
Fixed 64k speech
C00124
Fixed Aero 64k speech
C00404
Fixed data
C00504
Fixed facsimile
C00606
Fixed 64k UDI
C00607
Fixed 56k UDI
C00610
Fixed 64k audio 3k1
C00622
Fixed Aero 64k UDI
C00623
Fixed Aero 56k UDI
C00625
Fixed Aero 64k audio 3k1
CD0FFF
Fixed Mini-M
CE0FFF
Fixed HSD
CF0FFF
Fixed
FFFD
ACSE end marker (MPDS)
FFFE
Status undefined (MPDS)
FFFF
Status OK (MPDS)
23-15-30
H-15
3 JUN 10
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
eNfusion® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal
Blank Page
23-15-30
H-16
3 JUN 10
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : 
Create Date                     : 2010:06:03 14:01:26Z
Modify Date                     : 2010:06:14 08:48:14-07:00
Has XFA                         : No
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Metadata Date                   : 2010:06:14 08:48:14-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : MN-1252-33412
Creator                         : 
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:407a8880-79c1-4971-ac3a-8c62acd37903
Instance ID                     : uuid:5127a3be-109f-4ac2-9117-f00aa6c53a83
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 262
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: K6KHSD-MK2

Navigation menu